all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User manua 1 | Users Manual | 5.47 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User manua 2 | Users Manual | 1.48 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual-1 | Users Manual | 5.68 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual-2 | Users Manual | 1.25 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 3 4 5 | User manua 1 | Users Manual | 5.47 MiB |
Thor VM3 Vehicle-Mount Computer with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Users Guide Disclaimer Honeywell International Inc. (HII) reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made. The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII. HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII. 2014-2015 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Web Address: www.honeywellaidc.com Trademarks RFTerm is a trademark or registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.Micro-
soft Windows, ActiveSync, MSN, Outlook, Windows Mobile, the Windows logo, and Windows Media are registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Atom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Summit Data Communications, the Laird Technologies Logo, the Summit logo, and Connected. No Matter What are trade-
marks of Laird Technologies, Inc. Wi-Fi, WMM, Wi-Fi Mutlimedia, Wi-Fi Protected Access, WPA, WPA2 and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Symbol is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. Freefloat, Link*One, Key*One and Access*One are trademarks of Freefloat, Mlndalsvgen 30B, SE-412 63Gothenburg, Swe-
den. RAM and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108. Qualcomm is a registered trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated. Gobi is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated. Verizon is a registered trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC. T-MOBILE is a registered trademark of Deutsche Telekom AG. AT&T is a registered trademark of AT&T Intellectual Property. SD and SDHC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC in the United States, other countries or both. SanDisk and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation, registered in the United States and other countries. Transcend is a registered trademark of Transcend Information, Inc. ATP is a trademark of ATP Electronics, Inc. Acrobat Reader 2015 with express permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated. Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies and are the property of their respective owners. Patents For patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents. Table of Contents Chapter 1 - Thor VM3 Agency Information FCC Part 15 Statement........................................................................................................1-1 FCC 5GHz Statement ..........................................................................................................1-1 EMC Directive Requirements...............................................................................................1-1 Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices ................................................................................1-1 ANATEL (Brazil)...................................................................................................................1-2 Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement ..........................................................1-2 Li-Ion Battery........................................................................................................................1-2 RF Safety Notice..................................................................................................................1-3 Bluetooth..............................................................................................................................1-3 Honeywell Scanning & Mobility Product Environmental Information....................................1-3 CE Mark ...............................................................................................................................1-3 Chapter 2 - Getting Started Overview ..............................................................................................................................2-1 About this Guide ..................................................................................................................2-1 Out of the Box ......................................................................................................................2-2 Initial Setup for Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................2-2 Hardware Setup .............................................................................................................2-2 Software .........................................................................................................................2-2 Languages ...............................................................................................................2-2 First Boot..................................................................................................................2-2 Software Setup.........................................................................................................2-2 Quick Mount Smart Dock .....................................................................................................2-2 Components.........................................................................................................................2-3 Front View ......................................................................................................................2-3 Back View with Quick Mount Smart Dock ......................................................................2-3 Access Panels...............................................................................................................2-4 Backlights and Indicators .....................................................................................................2-5 Display Backlight............................................................................................................2-5 Power Management .................................................................................................2-5 Backlight Brightness.................................................................................................2-5 Screen Blanking .......................................................................................................2-5 Keypad Backlight ...........................................................................................................2-5 Speaker Volume.............................................................................................................2-5 Power Up .............................................................................................................................2-6 Rebooting the Thor VM3 ................................................................................................2-7 Restart......................................................................................................................2-7 Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus .............................................................................2-7 Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters ................................................................................2-7 Cleaning the Touch Screen .................................................................................................2-8 Startup Help .........................................................................................................................2-8 Chapter 3 - Hardware Overview 1 System Hardware ................................................................................................................ 3-1 802.11a/b/gWireless Client............................................................................................ 3-1 Central Processing Unit ................................................................................................. 3-1 Input/Output Components.............................................................................................. 3-1 System Memory............................................................................................................. 3-1 Video Subsystem........................................................................................................... 3-1 Audio Interface............................................................................................................... 3-1 Card Slots ...................................................................................................................... 3-1 CompactFlash (CF) Slot .......................................................................................... 3-1 Secure Digital (SD) Slot........................................................................................... 3-1 Bluetooth EZPair............................................................................................................ 3-1 WWAN ........................................................................................................................... 3-2 GPS ............................................................................................................................... 3-2 Power .................................................................................................................................. 3-2 Vehicle DC Power Supply.............................................................................................. 3-2 External AC Power Supply ............................................................................................ 3-2 Uninterruptible Power Supply ........................................................................................ 3-2 Safe Charging Temperature Range......................................................................... 3-2 Charging Timeout .................................................................................................... 3-3 Charging and Power Management .......................................................................... 3-3 Backup Battery .............................................................................................................. 3-3 Fuse............................................................................................................................... 3-4 Power Management Modes........................................................................................... 3-4 Power Controls .............................................................................................................. 3-4 Power Switch ........................................................................................................... 3-4 Power Button ........................................................................................................... 3-4 External Connectors ............................................................................................................ 3-4 Serial Connector (COM1 and COM2)............................................................................ 3-5 Screen Blanking...................................................................................................... 3-5 USB Connector(s).......................................................................................................... 3-5 CANbus / Audio Connector............................................................................................ 3-6 Power Supply Connector ............................................................................................... 3-6 Antenna Connections .................................................................................................... 3-6 External Antenna Connector.................................................................................... 3-7 Internal 802.11 Antenna .......................................................................................... 3-7 Vehicle Remote Antenna ......................................................................................... 3-7 Keyboard Options................................................................................................................ 3-8 Integrated Keypad ......................................................................................................... 3-8 Keypad LEDs........................................................................................................... 3-8 95-Key USB Keyboard................................................................................................... 3-8 Keyboard Backlight.................................................................................................. 3-8 USB Keyboard / Mouse ................................................................................................. 3-9 LED Functions ..................................................................................................................... 3-9 System LEDs ................................................................................................................. 3-9 SYS (System Status) LED ....................................................................................... 3-9 UPS Status LED .................................................................................................... 3-10 Charge Level.................................................................................................... 3-10 Charging State ................................................................................................. 3-10 2 SSD (Solid State Drive) LED ................................................................................. 3-10 Connection LEDs......................................................................................................... 3-11 WWAN LED ........................................................................................................... 3-11 Wi-Fi LED .............................................................................................................. 3-11 Bluetooth LED........................................................................................................ 3-11 Keyboard LEDs............................................................................................................ 3-12 Blue LED................................................................................................................ 3-12 Orange LED........................................................................................................... 3-12 Programmable LED ............................................................................................... 3-12 Display............................................................................................................................... 3-12 Touch Screen .............................................................................................................. 3-12 Touch Screen Defroster............................................................................................... 3-12 Screen Blanking........................................................................................................... 3-13 Display Backlight Control............................................................................................. 3-13 Chapter 4 - Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation Introduction........................................................................................................................ 4-15 Prepare for Vehicle Mounting ............................................................................................ 4-15 Quick Start ................................................................................................................... 4-15 Maintenance - Vehicle Mounted Devices .......................................................................... 4-15 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 4-16 Place Thor VM3 in the Dock.............................................................................................. 4-16 Dock I/O Pin Cover...................................................................................................... 4-17 Padlock ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 Laptop Security Cable ................................................................................................. 4-17 Install RAM Mount ............................................................................................................. 4-18 Components - RAM Mounting Kits .............................................................................. 4-18 Procedure - RAM Mount Assembly ............................................................................. 4-19 Torque Measurement ............................................................................................ 4-19 Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle ................................................................... 4-19 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-19 Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle ............................................................... 4-20 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-20 Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball ............................... 4-21 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-21 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock ....... 4-22 Step 3 Attach Thor VM3 Assembly to RAM Mount............................................. 4-22 Step 4 Place the Thor VM3 into the Dock........................................................... 4-22 Install U Bracket Mount ..................................................................................................... 4-23 Components - U Bracket Mounting Assembly ............................................................. 4-23 Procedure - U Bracket Assembly................................................................................. 4-23 Torque Measurement ............................................................................................ 4-23 Mounting Positions ................................................................................................ 4-24 Step 1 - Install U Bracket to Vehicle ...................................................................... 4-24 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-25 Step 2 - Remove RAM Ball.................................................................................... 4-25 Step 3 - Attach Adapter Bracket ............................................................................ 4-25 3 Connect Cables ................................................................................................................. 4-26 Strain Relief Cable Clamps.......................................................................................... 4-26 Connect Power ............................................................................................................ 4-27 Power Cable Cautions ................................................................................................. 4-27 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection)............................................ 4-28 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-28 Vehicle 10-60VDC Direct Power Connection.................................................. 4-28 Ignition Control Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 4-30 Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram ............................................................... 4-31 Manual Control Wiring Diagram................................................................. 4-32 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) ......... 4-33 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-34 Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection ........................................................... 4-34 Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 4-36 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) .......... 4-37 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-38 Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection ........................................................... 4-38 Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 4-40 VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable ...................................................................................... 4-41 Connect to VX6 / VX7 Power Cable ................................................................ 4-41 Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable ..................................................................... 4-42 Connect to Thor VX8 / VX9 Power Cable ........................................................ 4-42 Screen Blanking..................................................................................................... 4-43 Screen Blanking Cable .................................................................................... 4-43 Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable...................................................... 4-43 User-Supplied Cable.................................................................................. 4-44 Screen Blanking Box........................................................................................ 4-44 Screen Blanking with Switch............................................................................ 4-45 External AC/DC Power Supply .............................................................................. 4-46 Connect External Power Supply ...................................................................... 4-46 Connect USB Host....................................................................................................... 4-47 Connect USB Client..................................................................................................... 4-47 Connect Serial Device ................................................................................................. 4-47 Connect a Tethered Scanner................................................................................. 4-48 Connect Headset Cable............................................................................................... 4-48 Adjust Headset / Microphone and Secure Cable................................................... 4-49 Under Clothing ................................................................................................. 4-49 Over Clothing ................................................................................................... 4-49 Connect CANbus Cable............................................................................................... 4-49 Install Remote Antenna ............................................................................................... 4-50 802.11 Remote Mount Antenna............................................................................. 4-50 Components and Mounting Diagram ............................................................... 4-50 Typical Installation ........................................................................................... 4-51 Mounting Instructions....................................................................................... 4-51 WAN Remote Mount Antenna ............................................................................... 4-52 GPS Remote Mount Antenna ................................................................................ 4-52 4 Apply Touch Screen Protective Film ................................................................................. 4-53 Installation.................................................................................................................... 4-53 Removal....................................................................................................................... 4-53 Disconnect UPS Battery .................................................................................................... 4-54 Install SD Card .................................................................................................................. 4-55 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-55 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................. 4-55 Install SLC Drive................................................................................................................ 4-56 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-56 Install SIM Card ................................................................................................................. 4-57 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-57 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................. 4-57 Replace Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 4-58 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-58 Replacement Procedure .............................................................................................. 4-58 Chapter 5 - Software Microsoft Windows Setup and Configuration....................................................................... 5-1 Drive C Folder Structure ................................................................................................ 5-1 Software Loaded on Drive C.................................................................................... 5-1 Microsoft Windows............................................................................................. 5-1 Device Drivers.................................................................................................... 5-1 Radio Software .................................................................................................. 5-1 Touch Screen Software ..................................................................................... 5-2 RFTerm.............................................................................................................. 5-2 Summit Client Utility........................................................................................... 5-2 Laird Configuration Manager ............................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Link*One Wedge................................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Access*One TE (Optional).................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Key*One ............................................................................................. 5-2 Selecting Keyboard Layout .......................................................................... 5-2 Launching Keyboard .................................................................................... 5-2 Launching Keyboard with Programmable Key............................................. 5-2 Creating Customized Layout........................................................................ 5-3 Drive D Folder Structure ................................................................................................ 5-3 Control Panel....................................................................................................................... 5-4 About ............................................................................................................................. 5-4 Software................................................................................................................... 5-4 Firmware Versions ............................................................................................. 5-4 Language ........................................................................................................... 5-4 Versions................................................................................................................... 5-5 Versions Tab and the Registry........................................................................... 5-5 Network IP ............................................................................................................... 5-5 MAC Address..................................................................................................... 5-5 AutoOn........................................................................................................................... 5-6 Standard .................................................................................................................. 5-6 Ignition Control......................................................................................................... 5-6 5 Auto-On ................................................................................................................... 5-6 Bluetooth........................................................................................................................ 5-7 Bluetooth Devices.................................................................................................... 5-9 Discover................................................................................................................... 5-9 Stop Button ........................................................................................................ 5-9 Bluetooth Device List ....................................................................................... 5-10 Clear Button ..................................................................................................... 5-10 Bluetooth Device Menu.................................................................................... 5-10 Right-Click Menu Options .......................................................................... 5-10 Bluetooth Device Properties ............................................................................ 5-11 Settings.................................................................................................................. 5-11 Turn Off Bluetooth............................................................................................ 5-11 Options............................................................................................................. 5-11 Reconnect.............................................................................................................. 5-13 Options............................................................................................................. 5-13 About ..................................................................................................................... 5-14 Using Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 5-15 Bluetooth Devices Display - Before Discovering Devices................................ 5-15 Initial Configuration .......................................................................................... 5-15 Subsequent Use .............................................................................................. 5-15 Bluetooth Indicators ......................................................................................... 5-16 Bluetooth Bar Code Reader Setup .................................................................. 5-16 Thor VM3 with Label .................................................................................. 5-17 Thor VM3 without Label ............................................................................. 5-17 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications ......................................................... 5-18 Bluetooth Printer Setup.............................................................................. 5-18 Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect ................................................................... 5-18 Disk Lock ..................................................................................................................... 5-19 Display ......................................................................................................................... 5-21 Options ........................................................................................................................ 5-23 5V on COM1 .......................................................................................................... 5-23 5V on COM2 .......................................................................................................... 5-23 Touch Screen Disable ........................................................................................... 5-23 Keyboard Backlight................................................................................................ 5-23 USB Powered in Standby or Sleep........................................................................ 5-23 Power Options ............................................................................................................. 5-24 Select a Power Scheme or Power Plan................................................................. 5-24 Power Schemes............................................................................................... 5-24 Select a Power Plan......................................................................................... 5-25 AC/DC.............................................................................................................. 5-26 AC/DC Behavior............................................................................................... 5-27 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-27 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-27 Result ................................................................................................... 5-27 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-27 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-27 Result ................................................................................................... 5-27 Ignition Control/Ignition On .............................................................................. 5-28 6 Ignition Control/Ignition On Behavior ............................................................... 5-29 Thor VM3 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On ............................ 5-29 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-29 Result ................................................................................................... 5-29 Thor VM3 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On ............................ 5-29 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-29 Result ................................................................................................... 5-29 Ignition Control/Ignition Off .............................................................................. 5-30 Ignition Control/Ignition Off Behavior ............................................................... 5-31 Thor VM3 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Off ................................................ 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Thor VM3 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to Off ............................ 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Auto-On............................................................................................................ 5-32 Auto-On Behavior ............................................................................................ 5-33 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-33 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-33 Result ................................................................................................... 5-33 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-33 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-33 Result ................................................................................................... 5-33 UPS.................................................................................................................. 5-34 UPS Behavior .................................................................................................. 5-34 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Result ................................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Results ................................................................................................. 5-34 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Result ................................................................................................... 5-34 View UPS Battery Status ....................................................................................... 5-35 Power Meter..................................................................................................... 5-35 Power Notification Icon .................................................................................... 5-36 Configure Power Button Behavior.................................................................... 5-36 Advanced ................................................................................................... 5-36 Choose What the Power Button Does ....................................................... 5-37 Hibernate ............................................................................................................... 5-38 Enable Hibernation .......................................................................................... 5-38 Configure Hibernation ...................................................................................... 5-39 Programmable Key ...................................................................................................... 5-41 KeyMap.................................................................................................................. 5-42 Remap a Key to Single Key ............................................................................. 5-43 Remap a Key to a Unicode Value.................................................................... 5-43 7 Remap a Key to a Key Sequence.................................................................... 5-43 Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values............................................. 5-43 Remap a Key to a Special Function................................................................. 5-44 Remap a Key to Launch an Application........................................................... 5-44 Remap a Key to Run a Command ................................................................... 5-44 LaunchApp............................................................................................................. 5-45 RunCmd................................................................................................................. 5-46 Region and Language ................................................................................................. 5-47 Install a Language ................................................................................................. 5-47 Change Display Language .................................................................................... 5-48 Uninstall Language ................................................................................................ 5-48 Screen Control............................................................................................................. 5-49 Screen Blanking..................................................................................................... 5-51 Automatic Brightness Control ................................................................................ 5-51 Current Level ......................................................................................................... 5-51 Defroster Control ................................................................................................... 5-51 Screen Rotation ........................................................................................................... 5-52 Sounds......................................................................................................................... 5-52 System Rating (Windows Experience Index)............................................................... 5-53 Tablet PC Settings (Touch Screen Calibration)........................................................... 5-53 User Accounts ............................................................................................................. 5-53 Wi-Fi ............................................................................................................................ 5-53 Bar Code Readers............................................................................................................. 5-54 Scanner Wedge ........................................................................................................... 5-54 Touch Screen Calibration .................................................................................................. 5-54 BIOS .................................................................................................................................. 5-55 Accessing the BIOS Setup .......................................................................................... 5-55 Boot Order ................................................................................................................... 5-55 Exiting BIOS Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-55 Thor VM3 Recovery DVD .................................................................................................. 5-55 Thor VM3 with no Operating System................................................................................. 5-55 Upgrading the Thor VM3 ................................................................................................... 5-56 Automatic Firmware Update Utility .................................................................................... 5-56 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 5-56 Firmware Distribution Files .......................................................................................... 5-56 Update Process ........................................................................................................... 5-56 Configuration Cloning Utility (CCU) ................................................................................... 5-58 Launching Configuration Cloning Utility GUI ............................................................... 5-59 Windows Embedded Standard 7 and Windows 7 Professional:............................ 5-59 Using Configuration Cloning Utility GUI....................................................................... 5-59 Menu Options ........................................................................................................ 5-59 File ................................................................................................................... 5-59 About.......................................................................................................... 5-59 Open .......................................................................................................... 5-60 Close.......................................................................................................... 5-60 Save........................................................................................................... 5-60 Save As...................................................................................................... 5-60 Exit ............................................................................................................. 5-60 8 Edit................................................................................................................... 5-60 Registry............................................................................................................ 5-60 Import Settings........................................................................................... 5-60 Apply Settings ............................................................................................ 5-60 User ................................................................................................................. 5-60 Shortcuts................................................................................................................ 5-61 Modifying Settings ................................................................................................. 5-61 Using the CCU....................................................................................................... 5-62 Example 1: Import the current settings and save to a file ................................ 5-62 Example 2: Modify settings on the current device and save to a file ............... 5-63 Example 3: Reset a device to system defaults ................................................ 5-63 Example 4: Clone settings to another device................................................... 5-63 Configuration Cloning Utility Command Line Interface ................................................ 5-64 Chapter 6 - Wireless Network Connections Network Connections Control Panel.................................................................................... 6-1 Summit Wireless Network Configuration ............................................................................. 6-1 Important Notes ................................................................................................................... 6-1 Summit Client Utility ............................................................................................................ 6-1 Summit Tray Icon........................................................................................................... 6-1 Wireless Zero Config Utility ........................................................................................... 6-2 To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility .............................................. 6-2 To Switch Control to SCU........................................................................................ 6-2 Main ............................................................................................................................... 6-3 Admin Login............................................................................................................. 6-3 Profile............................................................................................................................. 6-5 Buttons..................................................................................................................... 6-5 Profile Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-6 Status............................................................................................................................. 6-8 Diags.............................................................................................................................. 6-9 Global .......................................................................................................................... 6-10 Custom Parameter Option ..................................................................................... 6-11 Global Parameters................................................................................................. 6-11 Logon Options ....................................................................................................... 6-13 Single Signon................................................................................................... 6-14 Pre-Logon Connection ..................................................................................... 6-14 Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials ......................................................................................... 6-15 To Use Stored Credentials .......................................................................................... 6-15 To Use Sign On Screen............................................................................................... 6-16 To Use Windows Username and Password ................................................................ 6-16 Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path.......................................................................... 6-17 User Certificates .......................................................................................................... 6-17 Root CA Certificates .................................................................................................... 6-17 Certs Path.............................................................................................................. 6-17 Windows Certificate Store ..................................................................................... 6-17 9 Configuring the Profile ....................................................................................................... 6-18 No Security .................................................................................................................. 6-19 WEP............................................................................................................................. 6-20 LEAP............................................................................................................................ 6-21 PEAP/MSCHAP........................................................................................................... 6-22 PEAP/GTC................................................................................................................... 6-24 WPA/LEAP .................................................................................................................. 6-26 EAP-FAST ................................................................................................................... 6-27 EAP-TLS...................................................................................................................... 6-29 WPA PSK .................................................................................................................... 6-31 Certificates......................................................................................................................... 6-32 Generate a Root CA Certificate ................................................................................... 6-32 Install a Root CA Certificate......................................................................................... 6-34 Generate a User Certificate ......................................................................................... 6-35 Exporting a User Certificate................................................................................... 6-36 Install a User Certificate............................................................................................... 6-37 Manually Initiate Certificate Installation ................................................................. 6-38 OneClick Internet............................................................................................................... 6-39 Preparing for Initial Use on the Thor VM3 ................................................................... 6-39 Install SIM Card ..................................................................................................... 6-39 Load Firmware....................................................................................................... 6-39 Activation ............................................................................................................... 6-39 Using OneClick Internet............................................................................................... 6-41 Connection Management....................................................................................... 6-41 Menu Buttons............................................................................................................... 6-42 Radio Button .......................................................................................................... 6-42 Statistics Button ..................................................................................................... 6-42 Update Button........................................................................................................ 6-42 Help Button ............................................................................................................ 6-42 Settings Button ...................................................................................................... 6-43 Profile............................................................................................................... 6-43 Buttons....................................................................................................... 6-44 Parameters ................................................................................................ 6-44 Network............................................................................................................ 6-45 Network with SIM Card .............................................................................. 6-45 CDMA Network .......................................................................................... 6-46 History.............................................................................................................. 6-46 PIN ................................................................................................................... 6-47 Activate/Deactivate PIN ............................................................................. 6-47 Change PIN ............................................................................................... 6-47 Info ................................................................................................................... 6-48 Firmware .......................................................................................................... 6-48 Activation on CDMA................................................................................... 6-49 General ............................................................................................................ 6-49 Application ....................................................................................................... 6-50 Application Buttons...................................................................................................... 6-50 SMS ....................................................................................................................... 6-50 Folder............................................................................................................... 6-51 10 Settings ............................................................................................................ 6-52 New SMS ......................................................................................................... 6-52 Reply................................................................................................................ 6-52 Forward............................................................................................................ 6-52 Move SMS.. .................................................................................................... 6-52 Delete............................................................................................................... 6-52 Send/Receive................................................................................................... 6-52 Addresses ........................................................................................................ 6-53 Web Browser ......................................................................................................... 6-53 Email...................................................................................................................... 6-53 GPS ....................................................................................................................... 6-53 About ........................................................................................................................... 6-54 System Requirements ........................................................................................... 6-54 Supported Languages...................................................................................... 6-54 Installing or Upgrading OneClick Internet ........................................................ 6-54 Installation........................................................................................................ 6-54 OneClick Internet Connection Manager....................................................................... 6-56 Connection Management....................................................................................... 6-57 Information Buttons................................................................................................ 6-58 Chapter 7 - Key Maps Integrated Keypad ............................................................................................................... 7-1 External 21-Key Keyboard................................................................................................... 7-2 External 95-Key Keyboard................................................................................................... 7-2 Chapter 8 - Specifications and Reference Material Technical Specifications ...................................................................................................... 8-1 Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................................... 8-1 Quick Mount Smart Dock............................................................................................... 8-2 Quick Mount Smart Dock 2............................................................................................ 8-2 Dimensions.......................................................................................................................... 8-3 Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 Quick Mount Smart Dock............................................................................................... 8-3 Environmental Specifications .............................................................................................. 8-4 Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock ....................................................................... 8-4 Network Card Specifications ............................................................................................... 8-4
?? 802.11a/b/g/n............................................................................................................ 8-4 Bluetooth........................................................................................................................ 8-4 WWAN ........................................................................................................................... 8-4 Port and Connector Pinouts ................................................................................................ 8-5 Power Supply Connector ............................................................................................... 8-5 COM1 and COM2 Connector ........................................................................................ 8-5 USB Connector.............................................................................................................. 8-6 USB Y Cable............................................................................................................ 8-6 D9 Male Connector ............................................................................................ 8-6 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-6 11 USB Client Connector........................................................................................ 8-6 USB Connector2............................................................................................................ 8-7 USB Y Cable............................................................................................................ 8-8 D15 Male Connector .......................................................................................... 8-8 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-8 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-8 CANbus / Audio Connector............................................................................................ 8-9 Headset Adapter Cable ........................................................................................... 8-9 D15 Female Connector...................................................................................... 8-9 Quick Connect Headset Connector ................................................................... 8-9 CANbus Y Cable.................................................................................................... 8-10 D15 Female Connector.................................................................................... 8-10 9-Pin J1939 (Deutsch) Connectors.................................................................. 8-10 Hat Encoding ..................................................................................................................... 8-11 Chapter 9 - Customer Support Product Service and Repair................................................................................................. 9-1 Technical Assistance........................................................................................................... 9-1 Limited Warranty ................................................................................................................. 9-1 12 1 Thor VM3 Agency Information Thor VM3 mobile computers meet or exceed the requirements of all applicable standards organizations for safe operation. However as with any electrical equipment, the best way to ensure safe operation is to operate them according to the agency guidelines that follow. Read these guidelines before using your Thor VM3. This documentation is relevant for the following Thor models: VM3. FCC Part 15 Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules [and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada]. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution - Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment. FCC 5GHz Statement For the band 5600-5650 MHz, no operation is permitted.
!
High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. EMC Directive Requirements This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure require-
ment regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.1. Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003. 1 - 1 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage adiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) L'ordinateur utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse suivante : http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux cartes sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.1 du document CNR-102, version 4. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Immediately following the above notice, the manufacturer shall provide a list of all antenna types approved for use with the trans-
mitter, indicating the maximum permissible antenna gain (in dBi). Description Type Gain Manufacturer External wifi antenna, dual band 2.40-2.50G/
4.90-5.90G. Dual Band Swivel Mount. Dipole RP-TNC Blade R380500314 2.4 ~ 2.5Ghz: 1.6dBi 4.9 ~ 5.9Ghz: 5dBi LARSEN External Two-Way Radio Antenna WTS 2450 2.4 to 2.485Ghz: 3dBi 4.9 to 5.9Ghz: 3dBi LAIRD Technologies ANATEL (Brazil) Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no causar interferncia a sistema operando em carter primrio. A Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connec-
tion is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches (12.7 cm) of the batterys pos-
itive (+) terminal. Use VM3055FUSEKIT (or equivalent) to install the fuse as shown below:
For 12VDC input, use the 10A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use the 6A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use the 4A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use the 3A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Li-Ion Battery When disposing of the Thor VM3 UPS battery, the following precautions should be observed: The battery should be disposed of properly. The battery should not be disassembled or crushed. The battery should not be heated above 212F (100C) or inciner-
ated. Safety requirements restrict the temperature at which the Li-Ion UPS battery can be charged. Charging is disabled if the ambi-
ent temperature is outside of the 0C to 35C safe charging range. In order to maintain UPS charge the Thor VM3 should have power applied while the unit is within the safe charging range for at least an hour each day. 1 - 2 RF Safety Notice This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accordance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation distance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. Bluetooth Class II Honeywell Scanning & Mobility Product Environmental Information Refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/environmental for the RoHS / REACH / WEEE information. CE Mark The CE marking on the product indicates that this device is in conformity with the following directives:
1999/5/EC R&TTE
2004/108/EC
2011/65/EU RoHS (Recast) In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply. European contact:
Hand Held Products Europe BV Nijverheidsweg 9-13 5627 BT Eindhoven The Netherlands Honeywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive. WWAN is not available in Singapore. 1999/5/EC EN 300 328 V1.8.1: 2012 EN 301 893 V1.7.1: 2012 EN 62311: 2008 EN 301511 V9.0.2 : 2003 EN 301908-1 V5.2.1 : 2011 EN 300440-2 V1.4.1 : 2010 EN 301489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 EN 301489-3 V1.6.1: 2013 EN 301489-7 V1.3.1 : 2005 EN 301489-17 V2.2.1: 2012 EN 301489-24 V1.5.1 : 2010 EN 55022 :2010 EN 55024 :2010 2004/108/EC EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 1 - 3 1 - 4 1 - 5 1 - 6 2 Getting Started Overview The Thor VM3 Vehicle Mount Computer (VMC) is a rugged, vehicle mounted computer running a Microsoft Windows 7 Pro-
fessional (64-bit) operating system and capable of wireless data communications from a fork-lift truck or any properly configured vehicle. Wireless communications are supported over a 802.11 WLAN network and, optionally, over a WWAN network. The Bluetooth module supports Bluetooth printers and scanners.
!
CAUTION - Before shipping the Thor VM3, be sure to Disconnect UPS Battery (page 4-54) . The Thor VM3 is designed for use with a vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock. The dock installs in the vehicle and connects to vehicle power. The dock provides conditioned input power for the Thor VM3. Peripheral connections are on the dock. The Thor VM3 is designed to easily be removed from the dock with a latch on the lower rear of the Thor VM3 housing. Since the dock remains attached to the vehicle, the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another vehicle equipped with a dock. The Thor VM3 contains a UPS battery which, when fully charged, can power the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes. This can be when the Thor VM3 is not attached to a Quick Mount Smart Dock or when the Thor VM3 is attached to a dock but the vehicle power is interrupted, such as when the vehicle battery is being changed. The Thor VM3 can be used with or without an external keyboard. There are 7 programmable keys (P1-P7) on the front bezel and, when used with the Orange modifier key, provide 7 additional programmable keys (P8-P14). Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for information on the latest upgrades for your Thor VM3. P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 About this Guide This users guide has been developed for a Thor VM3 with a Microsoft Windows 7 Professional operating system. 2 - 1 Out of the Box The following items may be packaged separately:
Thor VM3
Quick Mount Smart Dock (includes 10-60VDC power cable)
RAM or U-Bracket vehicle mount kit If you ordered additional accessories for the Thor VM3, verify they are also included with the order. Keep the original packaging material in the event the Thor VM3 should need to be returned for service. For details, see Product Service and Repair (page 9-
1). Initial Setup for Thor VM3 This page lists a quick outline of the steps you might take when setting up a new Thor VM3. More instruction for each step is listed later in this guide. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) if you need additional help. Hardware Setup 1. Install RAM Mount (page 4-18) or Install U Bracket Mount (page 4-23) to the vehicle. 2. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 3. Connect Cables (page 4-26) for any peripherals. 4. Connect Power (page 4-27). 5. Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 6. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the dock to the on position. 7. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the Thor VM3. Software This section only applies if the Thor VM3 was ordered with an operating system. For a Thor VM3 ordered without an oper-
ating system, see Thor VM3 with no Operating System (page 5-55). Languages The language selection and installation process varies by operating system:
The Thor VM3 with a Windows 7 Professional operating system provides a choice between English or Simplified Chinese upon initial configuration. Once selected, the operating system language cannot be changed without reinstallation using a recovery DVD. Recovery DVDs may also be available for additional languages. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) to order a Thor VM3 Recovery DVD (page 5-14). The language installed is identified on the Software tab of the About (see page 5-3) control panel. First Boot The first boot (also known as the Out of Box Experience) provides initial configuration of the Thor VM3. When a Thor VM3 is ordered with a Windows 7 Professional operating system, the product key is printed on a decal on the rear of the Thor VM3. It may be necessary to remove the Thor VM3 from the dock to view the product key decal. Under nor-
mal circumstances, it is not necessary to re-enter the product key as it was entered during the manufacturing process. If the Thor VM3 was ordered without an operating system, a product key must be provided by the customer to activate Windows. When a new Thor VM3 starts up a EULA (End User License Agreement) may be displayed on the touch screen. It remains on the screen until the Accept or Decline button is tapped with a stylus. Tap the Accept button to accept the EULA terms and the Thor VM3 continues the startup process. The EULA is not presented to the user again. Tap the Decline button to decline the EULA and the Thor VM3 reboots. It will continue to reboot until the Accept but-
ton is tapped with the stylus. 2 - 2 Software Setup Hardware setup should be completed before starting software setup. Smart Dock The Thor VM3 assembly consists of two parts, the Thor VM3 computer and the Smart Dock. The Thor VM3 contains an internal UPS battery that, once fully charged, powers the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes when the unit is not mounted in the Smart Dock. Standard Smart Dock The Standard Smart Dock provides:
A mount for the Thor VM3 computer. The dock attaches to a vehicle via a RAM or U-bracket mount or to a RAM table stand for use in an office environment.
Conditioned power for the Thor VM3. The dock accepts 10-60VDC power input directly or 50-150VDC power input with a DC/DC converter.
Strain relief cable mounts.
Mobility of the Thor VM3, since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another.
COM1 and COM2 serial connections for a tethered scanner, printer, PC connection, etc.
USB host connection via an adapter cable. This port also supports Honeywell external keyboards.
CANbus connection via an adapter cable.
Headset connection via an adapter cable. When a headset is not attached, the microphone and speakers on the Thor VM3 are active. Enhanced Smart Dock The Enhanced Smart Dock provides:
A mount for the Thor VM3 computer. The dock attaches to a vehicle via a RAM or U-bracket mount or to a RAM table stand for use in an office environment.
Conditioned power for the Thor VM3. The dock accepts 10-60VDC power input directly or 50-150VDC power input with a DC/DC converter.
Strain relief cable mounts.
Mobility of the Thor VM3, since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another.
COM1 and COM2 serial connections for a tethered scanner, printer, PC connection, etc.
USB1 connector provides host connection via an adapter cable. This port also supports Honeywell external keyboards.
USB2 connector provides 2 USB host connections via an adapter cable.
CANbus connection via an adapter cable.
Headset connection via an adapter cable. When a headset is not attached, the microphone and speakers on the Thor VM3 are active.
A USB host port is located on the top of the Enhanced Smart Dock.
An RJ-45 Ethernet connector is located on the top of the Enhanced Smart Dock. Additional Connectors External antenna connectors may be present on the back of the Thor VM3. The connectors may include:
802.11 antenna connectors, used when the Thor VM3 is not equipped with internal antennas.
External GPS antenna connector, when the Thor VM3 is equipped with GPS.
External WWAN antenna connectors, when the Thor VM3 is equipped with WWAN. Optional WWAN radio (available in North America, Europe, New Zealand, and Australia only). Components Front View - Thor VM3 2 - 3 Microphone Power Button Ambient Light Sensor P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 Back View - Thor VM3 Speakers 2 - 4 Dock Connector Panel Provision for Laptop Security Cable Provision for Padlock Quick Release Handle Access Panels - Thor VM3 SIM and mSATA Card Access Pane with door removed WWAN Antenna Cable Access Panel SIM Card and mSATA Access Panel 2 - 5 Backlights and Indicators Display Backlight There are several configuration options for the Thor VM3 display backlight:
Power Management The display backlight is controlled by power management. When the user activity timer expires, the display backlight is turned off. Timeouts can be set for the available power management schemes. See Power Options (page 5-6) for configuration options. Backlight Brightness The intensity of the display backlight can be manually configured:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2. 3. Press the P5 key to increase backlight brightness or the P6 key to decrease backlight brightness. 4. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. Refer to the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel for the current display brightness level. Screen Blanking The Thor VM3 can be configured to blank (blackout) the display while the vehicle is in motion. Refer to the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel for information. Keypad Backlight By default, the integrated keypad backlight follows the display backlight. The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled. To change this behavior, see the Options (see page 5-23) control panel. The external USB keyboard backlight is manually controlled. Speaker Volume The speaker volume can be adjusted via the Thor VM3 keypad:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2. Press the P1 key to increase speaker volume or the P2 key to decrease speaker volume. 3. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. The current volume level can be viewed on the Sounds (page 5-11) control panel or via the system tray speaker icon. These items can also be used to adjust speaker volume 2 - 6 Power Up
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive and cannot. Please remove the USB drive and power up the Thor VM3 again. The Quick Mount Smart Dock has a power switch on the back. The On side of this rocker switch has a raised bump to allow the state of the switch to be determined when the switch may not be easily viewed, for example, after the dock is mounted in a vehicle. After external power has been connected and the Thor VM3 has been mounted in the dock, press the side of the power switch with the raised bump to pass power from the dock to the Thor VM3. Next locate the power button on the front of the Thor VM3. Press the power button to turn the Thor VM3 on. When the Windows desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power up sequence is complete. See Power Controls (see page 3-4) for more information. 2 - 7 Rebooting the Thor VM3
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive:
If the USB drive contains a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 boots from the USB drive. If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 does not boot. Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM3 again.
Restart Restart performs a controlled shutdown of the Thor VM3 and then restarts the device.
Use the Ctrl + Alt + Del keypress sequence to start the task manager. Tap the Shut Down button and select Restart from the pull-down list. Tap the OK button to restart the Thor VM3.
Select Start > Shut Down > Restart and tap OK to restart the Thor VM3 Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus Note: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touch screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or sharp/abrasive object to write on the touch screen. Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use. Using a stylus is similar to moving the mouse pointer then left-clicking icons on a desktop computer screen. Using the stylus to tap icons on the touch screen is the basic action that can:
Open applications
Choose menu commands
Select options in dialog boxes or drop-down boxes
Drag the slider in a scroll bar
Select text by dragging the stylus across the text
Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data
Place the cursor in a text box prior to retrieving data using a scanner/imager. A right click is generated by tapping the mouse icon , usually located in the upper right hand corner of the screen. After tapping, the mouse icon highlights the right button. The next touch screen tap is treated as a right click. The mouse icon returns to the left button highlighted so subsequent taps are treated as left clicks. Note:
If the mouse icon is not displayed, this feature can be enabled by tapping the PenMount icon the menu that pops up, tap the Right Button to enable the mouse icon. When this option is enabled, a checkmark is displayed in the menu. in the System Tray. From A stylus replacement kit is available. When a dialog box is too large for the display, tap and drag the dialog box up or down or from side to side to view the remainder of the dialog box. Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters Note: The instructions below are for Honeywell RFTerm. If a different terminal emulation software is installed on your Thor VM3 refer to the documentation for that software. Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know:
1. Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are connecting over wireless LAN the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and the port number (Telnet Port) of the host system to properly set up your host session.
(802.11x), make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point. 2. From Start > Program, run RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop. 3. Select Session > Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require. This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e., 3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host. 2 - 8 4. Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system. 5. Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port. If not, just use the default telnet port. 6. Select OK. 7. Select Session > Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Tool Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen displayed. To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Bar Code, etc., refer to these sections in the RFTerm Reference Guide for complete descriptions of these and other features. Cleaning the Touch Screen Note: These instructions are for components made of glass. If there is a removable protective film sheet on the display, remove the film sheet before cleaning the screen. Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the bar code reader scanning aperture and the mobile device touch screen. If the glass becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex without vinegar or use isopropyl alcohol. Dampen the cloth with the cleaner and then wipe the surface. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint and particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Startup Help Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) if you need more help. Thor VM3 seems to lockup as soon as it is rebooted. There may be slight delays while the wireless client connects to the network, authoriza-
tion for voice-enabled applications complete, and Bluetooth relationships establish or re-
establish. When an application begins, the Thor VM3 is ready for use. 2 - 9 2 - 10 3 Hardware Overview System Hardware 802.11a/b/gWireless Client Central Processing Unit The CPU is a 1.6 GHz Intel Atom processor. The operating system is Microsoft Windows . The OS image is stored on an internal CompactFlash memory card and is loaded into DRAM for execution. Input/Output Components The Thor VM3 supports the following I/O components of the core logic:
Two 9-pin RS-232 serial ports, COM1 and COM2.
One slot for SD memory card.
CompactFlash (CF) memory card drive.
Ports available via adapter cables: USB host port, CANbus, Audio. System Memory Main system memory is GB SDRAM. Integrated keyboard. Video Subsystem The Thor VM3 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display. The video subsystem complies with the VESA VL bus standard. The resolution of this display is 800 x 480 pixels. This resolution complies with the WVGA graphics industry standard. The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Audio Interface Speakers are located on the bottom front of the Thor VM3. A headset adapter cable provides a connection for headset operation. When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable, the main speakers are disabled. A microphone is located at the upper right of the Thor VM3 display, near the Thor VM3 emblem. When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable, the internal microphone is disabled. Card Slots CompactFlash (CF) Slot The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable. The Thor VM3 must be powered down to insert or remove an ATA card. Since the operating system is stored on the CF ATA card, the Thor VM3 cannot operate without the ATA card. Secure Digital (SD) Slot The SD slot accepts an SD memory card. The SD card is hot swappable. Bluetooth EZPair The Thor VM3 contains Bluetooth version 2.0 with Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air. Bluetooth device connection (or pairing) can occur at distances up to 32.8 ft (10 meters) Line of Sight. The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active. The user cannot select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the Thor VM3. However, the Thor VM3 sup-
ports authentication requests from pairing devices. If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption, the Thor VM3 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode. Maximum encryption is 128 bit. Encryption is based on the length of the users passcode. 3 - 1 Bluetooth simultaneously supports one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner, either as a slave or as a mas-
ter Bluetooth device.
The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation.
Multiple beeps may be heard during a bar code scan using a mobile Bluetooth scanner; beeps from the mobile Bluetooth scanner as the bar code data is accepted/rejected, and other beeps from the Thor VM3 during final bar code data manipulation. WWAN WWAN (Wireless Wide Area Networking) is available on the Thor VM3. A slot is provided for a SIM card. GPS GPS (Global Positioning System) is available on the Thor VM3. Power Vehicle DC Power Supply Vehicle power input for the Thor VM3 dock is 10V to 60V DC and is accepted without the need to perform any manual oper-
ation within the Thor VM3 dock, see 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28). The dock provides a conditioned power output for the Thor VM3. By using a specified DC/DC power supply, input voltage of 50-150V DC can be accepted, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37) or 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37). Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible, see Fuse (page 3-4). External AC Power Supply If DC power is not available for example, in an office environment an optional external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate DC level. AC to DC power input for the Thor VM3 is delivered to the Quick Mount Smart Dock via an optional external power supply and adapter cable. See External AC/DC Power Supply
(page 4-46). Uninterruptible Power Supply The Thor VM3 contains an internal UPS battery. The user can Replace UPS Battery (page 1-83) The UPS battery is automatically charged when the Thor VM3 is placed in a powered dock, provided the safe charging tem-
perature conditions below are met. When external power is removed, the UPS automatically powers the Thor VM3 with no user intervention. When running on UPS power, the power management timeouts may be different than when vehicle power is applied. The UPS allows the Thor VM3 to continue operation when not mounted in a dock or when the vehicle battery is being swapped. When fully charged the UPS battery is designed to power the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes at tem-
peratures of -20C (-4F) or greater. For the extended temperature version of the Thor VM3, the UPS provides a minimum of 10 minutes of operation between -20C (-4F) and -30C (-22F). If operating on UPS power and the UPS battery becomes critically low, the Thor VM3 performs a controlled shutdown. If there is no external power available, there must be 10% or greater power in the UPS battery or the Thor VM3 does not power on. The UPS status LED and the Battery Control Panel can be used to monitor the state of the UPS battery. Safe Charging Temperature Range The internal temperature of the Thor VM3 is the trigger for UPS battery charging.
The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM3 temperature is below 0C (32F). This corresponds to an ambient (room) temperature of approximately -10C (-14F).
The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM3 temperature is above 45C (113F). This corresponds to an ambient (room) temperature of approximately 35C (95F). 3 - 2
If the UPS battery cannot be charged due to a temperature extreme, the UPS Status LED (page 3-10) is amber. Move the Thor VM3 to a different location to charge the UPS battery. When the Thor VM3 is operated in an environment where the UPS battery is not able to charge due to temperature extremes, the Thor VM3 should be removed to a location within the safe charging temperature range during off hours. A discharged UPS battery cannot protect against data loss in the event vehicle power is interrupted. Charging Timeout
A fully discharged UPS battery normally recharges in less than 4 hours when the Thor VM3 is in a powered dock and within the safe charging temperature range. If the UPS battery is not charged before an 8 hour (or 4 hours for some earlier software revisions) timeout period expires, the UPS Status LED (page 3-10) is amber.
The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes upon application of external power.
The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes when the Thor VM3 enters the permissible temperature range for charging. Charging and Power Management Backup Battery The Thor VM3 has a permanent Lithium battery installed to maintain time, date and CMOS setup information for a minimum of 90 days. The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last years with normal use before it requires replace-
ment. Note: The backup battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel. 3 - 3 Fuse The Thor VM3 uses an 8A time delay (slow blow), fuse that is externally accessible and user replaceable. The fuse is located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The fuse is accessed by unscrewing the cap as indicated. Should it need replacement, replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input power before changing the fuse. Power Management Modes Power Controls Power Switch After all cables are connected, the Thor VM3 can be powered on. There is a power switch located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch is a rocker switch. The power switch has a raised bump to identify the switch position even when it is hidden from view. When the side of the switch with the raised bump is pressed, the power switch is On. If the dock is connected to external power, the dock delivers power to the Thor VM3. Generally, once the dock is powered On, there is no need to power it off. The dock power can remain On even when the Thor VM3 is not attached. Power Button External Connectors Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port (serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). The external I/O connectors for the Thor VM3 are located on the right side of the Quick Mount Smart Dock (when viewed from the back). The Power Supply Connector (page 3-6) is on the left side of the dock (when viewed from the back). Antenna connectors are located on the top rear of the Thor VM3. 3 - 4 Serial Connector (COM1 and COM2) COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO The COM1 and COM2 connectors are D-9 male connectors located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port
(serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). The serial connectors are industry-standard RS-232, PC/AT standard 9pin D male connector. See COM1 and COM2 Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout detail. See Connect Serial Device (page 4-47) for more information. If a COM port is not being used for a scanner, it can be used for Screen Blanking (page 4-43) when the vehicle is in motion. Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc Screen Blanking The screen blanking signal can be provided either by a Honeywell Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch or relay. See Screen Blanking (page 4-43) for information on connecting screen blanking accessories. USB Connector(s) The USB or USB1 connector is a D-9 female connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinout detail. The USB-2 connector is a D-15 female connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinout detail. Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port
(serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc 3 - 5 CANbus / Audio Connector COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO The CANbus/Audio connector is a D-15 male connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CAN-
bus cable. The Thor VM3 does not support connecting audio and CANbus simultaneously. See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pin-
out detail. A headset cable attaches to the CANbus / Audio connector and provides a quick connect connection for a headset. See Connect Headset Cable (page 4-48) for more information. The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 (Deutsch) and 9 pin M SAE J1939 (Deutsch) connector. See Connect CANbus Cable (page 4-49) for more information. The CANbus interface is a virtual COM4 port. This port can be accessed using standard Windows API calls. Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc Power Supply Connector Power is supplied to the Thor VM3 through the power connector. Additionally this assembly pro-
vides a connection point for the vehicles chassis ground to be connected internally to the conduc-
tive chassis of the computer. The Thor VM3 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 10 to 60 Volts DC. See Power Supply Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout detail. See Connect Power (page 4-
27) for more information on connecting power to the Thor VM3. Antenna Connections 1 2 3 4 5 1. WI-FI (MAIN) 802.11 Main External Antenna Connector The Thor VM3 is equipped with an 802.11 radio and can be ordered with internal an-
tennas, external antennas or external remote mount antennas. When the Thor VM3 is ordered with internal antennas, the external antenna connectors are not used. GPS and WWAN are optional on the Thor VM3 and require external remote mount antennas. 2. WAN (MAIN) (Blue label) Main WWAN Antenna Connector 3. GPS (Green label) GPS Antenna Connector 4. WAN (AUX) (Blue label) Auxiliary WWAN Antenna Connector 5. WI-FI (AUX) 802.11 Auxiliary External Antenna Connector 3 - 6 External Antenna Connector When the Thor VM3 is ordered with the internal antenna option, the 802.11 antenna connectors on the back are not connected to the 802.11 radio. Instead the internal antenna connector is connected to the 802.11 radio. Remove the rubber cap, if present, from the antenna connector before connecting an external antenna. Internal 802.11 Antenna If the internal 802.11 antenna option is ordered, antennas are mounted inside the Thor VM3. The internal antennas are not user accessible. Vehicle Remote Antenna The external antennas can be remotely mounted on the vehicle. See Install Remote Antenna (page 4-50) for instruc-
tions. External antenna kits are available for the 802.11 Wi-Fi radio, GPS and WWAN. 3 - 7 Keyboard Options
Integrated Keypad P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 The integrated keypad contains seven programmable keys, a blue modifier key and an orange modifier key. The P1 though P7 keys are user programmable.
When used with no modifier key, P1 through P7 can be configured for a user programmable function.
When used with the Orange modifier key, P1 through P7 provide secondary programmable keys, P8 through P14, and can be configured for a user programmable function.
The programmable keys can be remapped to provide a single keypress, a string of keypresses or to execute an application or command. Key remapping is configured via the Programmable Key (page 5-41) option in the Control Panel.
Programmable keys persist across a warmboot or power cycle.
When used with the Blue modifier key, P1 and P2 keys are used to adjust speaker volume and P5 and P6 keys are used to adjust display brightness. The Thor VM3 integrated keypad is backlit.
By default, the integrated keypad backlight follows the display backlight. When the display backlight is on, the integrated keypad backlight is on. If the display backlight brightness is increased (or decreased) the integrated keypad backlight brightness is increased (or decreased).The integrated keypad backlight and the display share the same timer, which is configured in the Power Options (page 5-6) control panel.
The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled via the Options (page 5-23) control panel. Keypad LEDs See Keyboard LEDs (page 3-12) for details. 95-Key USB Keyboard Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Screen SysRq Scroll Lock Pause Break
!
1
~
`
Tab Caps Lock Shift Ctrl
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
) 0 Q A W S E D R F T Y G H U J I K O L C V B N M
<
, Z X Alt _
-
+
=
BackSpace
{
[
"
'
?
/
P
:
;
>
. Alt
}
]
|
\
Enter Shift Ctrl
/
8 5 2 Num Lock 7 Home 4 1 End 0 Ins Fn
-
+
*
9 PgUp 6 3 PgDn
. Del Enter L R The Thor VM3 uses an optional rugged QWERTY 95 key keyboard, designed for ease of use with the Windows CE operat-
ing system. The USB keyboard connects directly to the D9 USB connector on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock.
The 95 key keyboard supports all 104 keyboard functions (101 standard keyboard plus Windows keys) and includes an integrated pointing device and left and right mouse buttons. However, because the keyboard only has 95 keys, all functions are not visible (or printed on the keyboard). Therefore the keyboard supports what is called hidden keys - keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard.
The 95 key keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight is manually controlled. Keyboard Backlight The keyboard backlight key in the top right hand corner has a light bulb icon. 3 - 8 The keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight is manually controlled using the backlight key in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard. Pressing the backlight key cycles the keyboard backlight through the levels of backlight intensity: Off, Low intensity, Medium intensity, Maximum intensity, Off, etc. When the Thor VM3 is powered on, the key-
board backlight defaults to Off. Since the keyboard is a USB device, by default the external keyboard backlight is turned off when the Thor VM3 enters Standby/Sleep. This behavior can be changed by enabling USB power in Standby/Sleep on the Options (page 5-23) control panel. USB Keyboard / Mouse A standard USB keyboard or mouse can be attached to the Thor VM3 using the appropriate adapter cable. The Y cable attaches to the Thor VM3 and provides a USB connector. Please refer to documentation provided with the USB keyboard or mouse for more information on their operation. LED Functions System LEDs Programmable LED Connection LEDs Blue LED Orange LED System LEDs SYS (System Status) LED UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) LED SSD (Solid State Drive) LED SYS UPS SS D SYS (System Status) LED LED Behavior System State Solid Green
On
On but Display Off Green blinking very slowly External power present
(1/2 sec. on, 4 1/2 sec. off) Off External power present
Off 3 - 9 LED Behavior System State Off External power not present Green blinking slowly External power present
(1/2 sec. on, 1 1/2 sec. off) Green blinking slowly External power not present
(1/2 sec. on, 1 1/2 sec. off)
Off CPU temperature less than -20C, Heater warming CPU for 30 sec. CPU temperature less than -20C, Need to move unit to warmer environment UPS Status LED The color of the UPS LED identifies the charge level, while the behavior of the LED identifies the charging state. Charge Level LED Color Status Green Amber Fully charged (>90%)
Less than fully charged, but more than 2 minutes runtime remaining
Out of Safe Charging Temperature Range (page 3-2) Charging only occurs between approximately -10C and 35C ambient temperature
No UPS present
Charging Timeout (page 3-3) Not fully charged after 4 or 8 hours depending on software revision. Red Low battery, less than 2 minutes runtime until shutdown Charging State LED Behavior Slow Blink
(1 sec. on, 3 sec. off) Fast Blink
(1/2 sec. on, 1/2 sec. off) On Off Status Charging UPS supplying power and discharging Neither charging or discharging Unit is off or is in Suspend SSD (Solid State Drive) LED LED Behavior Status Flashing Green SSD read or write activity Off No SSD read or write activity 3 - 10 Connection LEDs WWAN LED Wi-Fi LED Wi Fi Bluetooth LED WWAN LED LED Behavior Solid Green Off Wi-Fi LED LED Behavior Solid Green Off Status Indicates a WWAN connection to a network Indicates no WWAN connection Status Indicates a connection with an IP address to an Access Point Indicates no connection to an Access Point Bluetooth LED LED Behavior Status Blue Blinking Slowly Blue Blinking Medium Blue Blinking Fast Off Bluetooth is paired but not connected to a device Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Bluetooth is discovering Bluetooth devices Bluetooth hardware has been turned off The Bluetooth LED blinks once every 6 seconds when the Bluetooth client is paired but not connected. It blinks once for a very short time every 2 seconds when paired and connected. It blinks every second when in discovery. The LED is off when the Bluetooth client is off. 3 - 11 Keyboard LEDs The keyboard LEDs are located near the specified key. Blue LED Solid Blue Indicates the Blue modifier key is active
Pressing the Blue key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED
Pressing the Orange key exits the Blue mode and turns off the Blue LED
If no key other key is pressed within five seconds, the Blue key times out and turns off the LED
When Blue mode is active, keys P1 through P4 provide volume and brightness adjustment functions Off Blue mode is not invoked Orange LED LED Behavior Solid Orange Off Status
Indicates the Orange modifier key is active. Orange mode is invoked for the next keypress only
Pressing the Orange key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED
Pressing the Blue key exits the Orange mode and turns off the Orange LED Orange mode is not invoked. Programmable LED The Programmable LED is available for user applications. The LED defaults to Off unless activated by user applica-
tion. Display The display is a thin-film transistor display capable of supporting WSVGA graphics modes. Display size is 1024x768 pixels. The display covering is designed to resist stains. The touch screen allows signature capture and touch input. The display sup-
ports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Touch Screen The touch screen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a stylus, and translate them into computer commands. In effect, it simulates a computer mouse. Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used. A right mouse click is simulated by touching and holding the screen for the appropriate time interval. When a dialog box is too large for the display, tap and drag the dialog box up or down or from side to side to view the remainder of the dialog box. Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use an actual pen, pencil, sharp or abrasive object to write on the touch screen. An extra or replacement stylus may be ordered. A replaceable touch screen protective film is available when the Thor VM3 is used in an abrasive environment. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for availability. Note:
If the touch screen is disabled or looses calibration on a Thor VM3, you must use a USB mouse or keyboard attached to the Thor VM3 to access the control panel to re-enable or recalibrate the touch screen unless a programmable key has been assigned to that function. Touch Screen Defroster Extended temperature versions of the Thor VM3 contain a touch screen defroster. The touch screen defroster can be dis-
abled when not needed via the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel. The defroster trip point is configurable. The defroster is always disabled when the device is operating from UPS battery power. 3 - 12 Screen Blanking Screen blanking (blackout) can be enabled when the vehicle is in motion. See Screen Blanking (page 4-43) for hardware setup and Screen Control (page 5-9) for software setup to enable screen blanking. Once screen blanking is enabled, the display is blanked out any time when the cable sends the signal the vehicle is in motion. If the cable is removed, screen blanking is disabled and the display remains on. Display Backlight Control The display brightness on a Thor VM3 equipped with an outdoor display can be configured to automatically adjust depend-
ing on the ambient light level via Screen Control (page 5-9). Note: When automatic brightness control is enabled, the manual display brightness controls described below have no effect. The display brightness can be adjusted manually, via the keypad:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode. 2. 3. Press P5 to increase brightness or P6 to decrease brightness. 4. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. 3 - 13 3 - 14 4 Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation Introduction The Thor VM3 is designed to be mounted to a Quick Mount Smart Dock in a vehicle with either a RAM mount or U Bracket sys-
tem. A power cable is provided with the Thor VM3 dock. Optional communication cables are available. Vehicle mounting brackets are specifically designed for vehicle mount applications. The vehicle mounted assembly restrains the Thor VM3 and isolates it from shock and vibration. A RAM metal table stand is available to secure the Thor VM3 and dock when in an office environment, for example. The vehicle mount holds the Quick Mount Smart Dock and the Thor VM3 attaches to the dock. The dock remains attached to the vehicle, however, the Thor VM3 has a quick release located on the lower rear side that allows the Thor VM3 to easily be removed from the dock. The Thor VM3 can be operated for a minimum of 30 minutes from an internal UPS battery when not attached to a dock. The Thor VM3 can be transferred from one dock equipped vehicle to another for easy portability. The dock provides accessory attachment and conditioned power for the Thor VM3. Overhead, dash and roof support pillar mounting is via a RAM Mount or U-bracket accessory which includes all the hardware required for vehicle mounting. Never put the Thor VM3 into the vehicle mounted assembly until the assembly is securely fastened to the vehicle. Prepare for Vehicle Mounting The Thor VM3 should be secured to an area in the vehicle where it:
Does not obstruct the driver's vision or safe vehicle operation.
Will be protected from rain or inclement weather.
Will be protected from extremely high concentrations of dust or wind-blown debris.
Can be easily accessed by a user seated in the driver's seat while the vehicle is not in operation. Quick Start The following list outlines, in a general way, the process to follow when mounting the Thor VM3 in a vehicle. Refer to the fol-
lowing sections in this document for more details. 1. Install RAM Mount (page 4-18) or Install U Bracket Mount (page 4-23) to the vehicle. 2. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 3. Adjust the Thor VM3 to the best viewing angle. 4. Install Remote Antenna (page 4-50) if necessary. 5. Connect Cables (page 4-26) for any peripherals. 6. Connect vehicle power:
12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28)
60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37)
60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33).
Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable (page 4-42)
VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable (page 4-41) 7. Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). The Thor VM3 is ready for use. Maintenance - Vehicle Mounted Devices Check the vehicle mounting hardware frequently and re-tighten if necessary. If the vehicle mounting hardware and connections become broken, loose or cracked, the assembly must be taken out of service and replaced. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for help. 4 - 15 Cleaning Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the Thor VM3 surfaces, cables, connectors and mounting hardware. Use a clean soft cloth to wipe any dirt, moisture or grease from the Thor VM3, connectors, cables or the vehicle mounting hard-
ware. Do not use any liquid to clean the Thor VM3, or connectors. Spray or dampen the cleaning cloth with the cleaning liquid. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock Back of Thor VM3 Front of Smart Dock Upper Lip on Dock Notch on Thor VM3 Lower Lip on Dock Release Lever 1. Locate the notch on the upper rear of the Thor VM3. 2. Slide this notch over the top lip of the dock. Slide the Thor VM3 from side to side on the dock to make sure it fully engages on the lip of the dock. If the Thor VM3 cannot be slid side to side, the lip is engaged. 3. Pull the quick release lever on the Thor VM3 down and push the Thor VM3 against the dock. 4. Release the quick release lever. The quick release lever catches the lower lip on the dock and secures the Thor VM3 to the dock. 5. If necessary, adjust the viewing angle of the Thor VM3. When the Thor VM3 is placed in the dock, the following may happen:
When the Thor VM3 is removed from the dock, the following may happen:
4 - 16 Dock I/O Pin Cover. The dock contains a tethered I/O Pin Cover to protect the I/O pins on the dock when a Thor VM3 is not mounted in the dock.
When the Thor VM3 is not installed in the dock, use the I/O Pin Cover to protect the pins on the dock as shown.
When a Thor VM3 is installed in the dock, the I/O Pin Cover can be placed out of the way behind the dock. Padlock It may be desirable to secure the Thor VM3 in the dock so it cannot be removed from the dock. The quick release handle on the Thor VM3 is notched to allow a user supplied standard padlock to be placed through a hole in the bracket on the back of the Thor VM3 in the location shown below. Once the padlock is installed, the release handle cannot be moved so the Thor VM3 cannot be removed from the dock. The padlock shackle must be smaller than 3/16 (4.76mm). A cable tie wrap can be used instead of a padlock if desired. Laptop Security Cable The Thor VM3 can be secured with a standard laptop security cable using the slot on the back of the Thor VM3. 4 - 17 Install RAM Mount CAUTION - This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor-
dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis-
tance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. This device is not to be co-located with other transmitters. Before installation begins, verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary, as shown in the following figures. Components - RAM Mounting Kits In addition to the kits below, individual RAM mounting components are also available. Each mounting kit contains:
RAM Ball (Size D) for back of Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock with hardware (screws and washers) to attach RAM ball to dock RAM Arm (Size D), length varies by kit selected One of three mounting options:
RAM Ball mount (Size D, may include 3 cone washers), or
RAM Clamp mount (Size D), or
RAM Plate mount with RAM Ball (Size D) with Hardware (cone washers and nuts) to attach Ball to Plate 4 - 18 Procedure - RAM Mount Assembly Equipment Needed: Sockets, screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds (5.64.56 N/m). Note: Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell. Tools needed to attach the RAM Clamp Mount to the vehicle are not supplied by Honeywell. Torque Measurement You will need a torquing tool capable of torquing to 20 inch pounds (1.10 N/m). Torque all screws and bolts according to the following table:
For these nuts 10-32 lock nuts Torque to 17 - 20 in/lb (0-95 - 1.10 N/m) Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle Note:
If you are using the RAM clamp mount, please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle (page 4-20). If you are using the RAM plate mount, please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball
(page 4-21). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball base. Be sure to position the RAM bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the RAM ball base to the vehicle mounting surface using three or four 1/4 bolts (not included) or equivalent fasteners. If the mounting kit includes cone washers, use those as illustrated below. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available. Mounting Dimensions Note: Drill and tap holes for three 1/4 bolts. Drawing not to scale. 60 60 3.69" / 93.73 mm 120 120 2.75" / 69.85 mm 4 - 19 Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle Note:
If you are using the RAM ball mount, please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle (page 4-19). If you are using the RAM plate mount, please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball (page 4-
21). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM clamp mount. The clamp mount can be used on a beam (such as on a fork lift truck) up to 2.5 (63.5 mm) wide and approximately 2 (50.8 mm) thick. The clamp may be attached to a thicker beam by substituting longer bolts (not included). Be sure to position the RAM clamp mount to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. Bolts Upper clamp piece Lower clamp piece Nuts 2. Position the upper clamp piece with ball on the beam. Place the bolts through the holes in the upper clamp piece. 3. Position the lower clamp piece below the beam. Align the bolts with the holes in the lower clamp piece. 4. Place the nylon locking nuts on the bolts and tighten the bolts. Mounting Dimensions Note: Drawing not to scale. 2.56 /
65.02mm 1.84 (46.74mm) 4 - 20 Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball Note:
If you are using the RAM ball mount, please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle (page 4-19) If you are using the RAM clamp mount, please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle (page 4-20). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball plate. Be sure to position the RAM plate to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the RAM ball plate to the vehicle mounting surface using four 1/4 bolts (not included) or equivalent fasten-
ers. 3. If not already attached, attach the RAM ball to the RAM ball plate using three M6 nuts and washers. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available. Mounting Dimensions There are 4 mounting holes in the plate. Use four 1/4 bolts to secure the plate to the vehicle. Note: Drawing not to scale. 176 mm 6.99 200 mm 7.87 76mm 2.99 100mm 3.94 4 - 21 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock 1. Turn the Thor VM3 off before attaching the RAM mount ball. 2. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. Step 3 Attach Thor VM3 Assembly to RAM Mount 1. Slip the Size D RAM arm over the ball on the vehicle RAM mount (RAM Ball mount shown). 2. Insert the ball on the dock into the RAM arm and tighten the knob on the RAM arm using the supplied RAM wrench. Step 4 Place the Thor VM3 into the Dock If the Thor VM3 is not already mounted to the dock, Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 4 - 22 Install U Bracket Mount Before installation begins, verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary, as shown CAUTION - This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor-
dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis-
tance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. This device is not to be co-located with other transmitters. in the following figures. Components - U Bracket Mounting Assembly The U bracket kit is available in two configurations:
With a U Bracket included for new vehicle installations
Without a U Bracket for installing the Thor VM3 in place of a previous Honeywell vehicle mounted computer, such as a VX6 or VX7. U Bracket (only included in kits for new installations) Adapter Bracket (includes screws, flat washers and lock washers to attach Adapter Bracket to Thor VM3 and to attach Adapter Bracket to existing U Bracket (for example, to a vehicle where a VX1, VX2, VX4, VX5, VX6 or VX7 was previously installed) Procedure - U Bracket Assembly Equipment Needed: Sockets and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds (5.64.56 N/m). Note: Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell. Torque Measurement You will need a torquing tool capable of torquing to 35-50 inch pounds (1.10 N/m). Torque all screws and bolts accord-
ing to the following table:
For these bolts Torque to 1/4-20x5/8 Bolts M5x16mm Bolts 1/4 Bolts (user supplied) 50 in/lb (5.6 N/m) 35 in/lb (4.0 N/m) 50.05 in/lb (5.64.56 N/m) 4 - 23 Mounting Positions The adapter bracket can be mounted in a high or low position, depending on viewing position, as shown below. Additionally, the slotted U bracket allows the Thor VM3 to be mounted vertically or tilted forward or backward for best viewing angle. Step 1 - Install U Bracket to Vehicle 1. Position the bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the bottom mounting bracket to the vehicle mounting surface using a minimum of four 1/4 bolts (or equiva-
lent) fasteners. Note: 1/4 bolts and washers not included. It is recommended to use lock washers and flat washers on the fasteners. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available.
[
After the bottom bracket has been attached to a rigid surface, you are ready to assemble the Thor VM3 bracket config-
uration. 4 - 24 Mounting Dimensions Note: Drawing not to scale. 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 1. 14.40 in / 359.2 mm 2. 12.10 in / 307.3 mm 3. 6.05 in / 153.6 mm 4. 1.02 in / 25.9 mm 5. 3.38 in / 85.85 mm 9 6. Vehicle Mount Footprint 8 7. 0.406 in / 10.312 mm 8. 0.88 in / 22.3 mm 9. 1.25 in / 31.75 mm Step 2 - Remove RAM Ball If the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock has a RAM ball attached, the RAM ball must be removed from the dock to use the U Bracket mount. Remove the RAM ball. The hardware used to attach the RAM ball to the dock is not reused for the U bracket mount. Step 3 - Attach Adapter Bracket Note: For the steps below, always place the lock washer on the bolt before the flat washer. 1. Attach the Adapter Bracket to the Thor VM3 dock using four each M5x16mm bolt, M5 lock washer and M5 flat washer. Torque to 35 in/lbs (4.0 N/m). 2. Attach the Thor VM3/Adapter Bracket assembly to the U Bracket using 4 each 1/4-20x5/8 bolt, 1/4 lock washer and 1/4 flat washer. 3. If the Thor VM3 is not already mounted to the dock, Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 4. Adjust the Thor VM3 to the desired viewing angle. 5. Torque the 14-20 bolts to 50 in/lbs (5.6 N/m). 4 - 25 Connect Cables There are many cables available for the Thor VM3 including power cables, and data/ communication cablesThor VM3. Strain Relief Cable Clamps Equipment Required: Phillips screwdriver (not supplied by Honeywell) There are five strain relief cable clamps secured to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. Use the strain relief clamps to secure audio, power, and I/O cables attached to the Thor VM3 dock. 1. Determine the proper strain relief cable clamp. There are three sizes of cable clamps on the Thor VM3 which should be matched to the cable to be secured. For example, the largest clamp (on the left when viewing the back of the Thor VM3) is designed to secure the power cable. 2. Remove the strain relief clamp from the Thor VM3 by turning the screw counterclockwise. Put the screw aside in a safe location. 3. Slide the strain relief clamp over the cable. 4. Using a Phillips screwdriver and the screw that was removed, refasten the clamp holding the cable to the Quick Mount. Do not stretch the cable. Leave enough slack in the cable to allow it to be connected and disconnected easily when needed. 5. Continue in this manner until all cables are secured to the Thor VM3 dock. 4 - 26 Connect Power Power options include:
12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (see page 4-28) - Direct connection to vehicle power.
60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (see page 4-33) - Requires the use of a DC/
DC power supply.
60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (see page 4-37) - Requires the use of a DC/
DC power supply.
VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable (see page 4-41) - For applications where the Thor VM3 replaces a previously installed VX6 or VX7.
Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable (see page 4-42) - For applications where the Thor VM3 replaces a previously installed Thor VX8 or Thor VX9.
Screen Blanking (see page 4-43) - Optional connection to blank the Thor VM3 display while the vehicle is in motion.
External AC/DC Power Supply (see page 4-46) - For use when DC power is not available to power the Thor VM3, such as in an office environment. See Power Supply Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout Power Cable Cautions
!
CAUTION - When routing the power cable:
Route power cable away from the outside of the fork truck.
Choose a mounting location so that the power cable does not extend outside the vehicle and that provides sufficient clearance so that the power cable (especially the dock connector end) is not pressed against part of the vehicle.
Use the proper Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26) to secure cable.
The power cable is less flexible in low temperature environments. Avoid sharp bends. Regularly inspect power cable for damage, especially in low temperature environments. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for replacement cable options. Power Cable Routing Power cable with straight connector Power cable with right-angle connector Avoid sharp bends in this area of the power cable 4 - 27 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection)
!
CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only.
!
!
Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27). Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Wire Color Red Red/White Black Black/White Green Blue Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
DC -
Ground Ignition Input (optional) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (optional) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See the figures below for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 10-60VDC Direct Power Connection 1. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 2. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-28), connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle (if using unswitched power). 3. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Please select electrical connectors sized for use with 20AWG (0.81mm2) conductors. 4. Refer to the wiring diagrams following this section for wire colors and connections:
Ignition Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-30) 4 - 28
Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-31)
Manual Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-32) 5. Route the power cable the shortest way possible removing any left-over cable. The cable is rated for a maxi-
mum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 6. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 7. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 8. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 9. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 10. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 11. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 12. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 29 Ignition Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Ignition Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue Circular Power Connector
. See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 30 Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected) Circular Power Connector
. See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire is connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 31 Manual Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected) Circular Power Connector See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If there is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire is connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 32 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) This option requires DC/DC external power supply Honeywell Part no. 9000313PWRSPLY. Shown With Lid Attached
Lid is secured with screws on the side of lid. Shown With Lid Removed
One positive (Vin+), negative (Vin-) and ground (
Input and output connector blocks under lid. connection in input block.
)
One positive (Vo+) and negative (Vo-) connection in output block. CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27). If the DC/DC power supply does not have screws in the side of the lid, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37).
!
!
!
!
CAUTION - Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided. The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure. Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used, 4 - 33 Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
Wire Color Red (2 wires) Black (2 wires)
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Green Blue Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See Wiring Diagram (page 4-36) for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection 1. Please review the Wiring Diagram (page 4-36), before beginning power cable install. 2. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 3. Route the cable from the Thor VM3 to the DC/DC power supply. Route the power cable the shortest way pos-
sible. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). When routing this cable, it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 4. Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends. 5. Remove the lid from the DC/DC power supply. 6. Connect the stripped end of the positive wires (red and red/white twisted together or a single red wire) to the output block. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-34). 7. Connect the stripped end of the negative wires (black and black/white twisted together or a single black wire) to the output. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-34). Note: The input block has VIN+, VIN- and GND terminals. The output block has VO+ and VO- terminals. 4 - 34 8. Connect the ground (green) wire from the Thor VM3 to the GND terminal on the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 9. Route the wiring from the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system. Do not connect to vehicle power at this time. 10. Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 11. Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown. 12. Reattach the cover with the screws. 13. Connect the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system as directed below:
!
For battery powered vehicles:
VIN+ is connected to battery positive. ViN- must be connected to battery negative. GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
VIN+ is connected to battery positive. ViN- is connected to battery negative. GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 14. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-33) connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle. When available, always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel, after providing proper fusing. ATTENTION: For uninterrupted power, electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle. 15. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG (1mm2) conductors. 16. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket. 17. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely.Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On. 18. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 19. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 20. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 21. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 22. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. Note:
Ignition control is not available for trucks over 60VDC. 4 - 35 Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Forklift Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below See Caution statement below GND VIN+
VIN-
VO+
VO-
DC/DC Power Supply User supplied serial cable for optional screen blanking connection, see below Quick Mount Smart Dock COM1 or COM2 Connector on Dock Circular Power Connector on Dock Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected)
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used 4 - 36 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) This option requires DC/DC power supply Honeywell Part no. VX89303PWRSPLY, shown below. Shown With Lid Attached
Lid is secured with screws on the top of lid. Shown With Lid Removed
Two positive (+), negative (-) and ground (
Input and output connector blocks under lid. connections per terminal block
) CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. If the DC/DC power supply does not have screws in the top of the lid, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33).
!
!
CAUTION - The VX89303PWRSPLY power supply is sealed per IPXX. Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided. The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure. Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27).
!
!
Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 37 Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
Wire Color Red (2 wires) Black (2 wires)
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Green Blue Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See Wiring Diagram (page 4-40) for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection 1. Please review the Wiring Diagram (page 4-36), before beginning power cable install. 2. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 3. Route the cable from the Thor VM3 to the DC/DC power supply. Route the power cable the shortest way pos-
sible. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). When routing this cable, it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 4. Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends. 5. Remove the lid from the DC/DC power supply. 6. Connect the stripped end of the positive wires (red and red/white twisted together or a single red wire) to the output block. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-38). 7. Connect the stripped end of the negative wires (black and black/white twisted together or a single black wire) to the output. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-38). Note: The input and output blocks each have two + (plus), two
(minus) and two
(ground) connectors. Either connector in the block can be used to connect the matching polarity wire. 4 - 38 8. Route the wiring from the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system. Do not connect to vehicle power at this time. 9. Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 10. Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown. 11. Reattach the cover with the screws. 12. Connect the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system as directed below
!
For battery powered vehicles:
+ is connected to battery positive.
- must be connected to battery negative.:
must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
+ is connected to battery positive.
- is connected to battery negative. is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 13. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-37), connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle. When available, always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel, after providing proper fusing. ATTENTION: For uninterrupted power, electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle. 14. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG (1mm2) conductors. 15. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket. 16. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely.Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On. 17. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 18. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 19. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 20. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 21. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. Note:
Ignition control is not available for trucks over 60VDC. 4 - 39 Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Forklift Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below See Caution statement below
+
-
+
-
DC/DC Power Supply User supplied serial cable for optional screen blanking connection, see below Quick Mount Smart Dock COM1 or COM2 Connector Power Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected)
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 40 VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable An adapter cable is available to attach the Thor VM3 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX6/VX7 DC power cable. The adapter cable has a 5-pin connector to match with the VX6/VX7 power supply cable on one end and a 6-pin con-
nector to match to the Thor VM3 on the other end. This section assumes the VX6/VX7 power cable is properly con-
nected to vehicle power. Refer to the VX6 or VX7 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details.
!
CAUTION - Because the Thor supports 10-60 VDC power input, verify input voltages before using this adapt-
er cable with an existing VX6 or VX7 power connection installation. To Power Connector on Dock To VX6/VX7 Power Supply Cable When this adapter cable is used, there is no provision for an ignition switch input. Therefore the vehicle ignition moni-
toring function is not available when using this cable. Connect to VX6 / VX7 Power Cable 1. Connect the cable to the Thor VM3 power cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 2. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be pro-
tected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 3. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 4. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 5. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 6. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 7. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 8. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 9. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 41 Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable An adapter cable is available to attach the Thor VM3 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX8/VX9 DC power cable. The adapter cable has a 6-pin connector to match the VX8/XVX9 power supply cable on one end and a 6-pin connec-
tor to match the Thor VM3 on the other end. The cable also has bare wires for ground and ignition sense connection plus a D9 cable to connect to a COM port on the Thor VM3 dock to provide a screen blanking signal. This section assumes the VX8/VX9 power cable is properly connected to vehicle power. Refer to the VX8 or VX9 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details. To VX8/VX9 Power Cable To Ground and Ignition Sense To COM port on Dock To Power Connector on Dock Connect to Thor VX8 / VX9 Power Cable 1. Connect the cable to the Thor VX8/VX9 power cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector;
push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 2. Connect the green wire to vehicle ground:
!
For battery powered vehicles:
The green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
The green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 3. 4. If ignition control will be used, connect the blue wire to an ignition switched circuit (less than 1mA over input voltage range). If ignition control is not used, the blue wire can be left disconnected, If the VX8/VX9 cable is connected to a screen blanking box or switch, connect the D9 connector to a COM port on the dock. 5. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe opera-
tion and maintenance of the vehicle. 6. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 7. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 8. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 9. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 10. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch if not previously installed. 11. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 12. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 42 Screen Blanking Prerequisite: The steps outlined in either 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28), 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33) or 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37) have been completed. Screen blanking is accomplished by either a Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch.
!
!
CAUTION - For proper and safe installation, the input power lead to the Screen Blanking Box requires a 3 Amp maximum time delay (slow blow) high interrupting rating fuse. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. Screen Blanking Cable Refer to Screen Control (in the Windows Control Panel) to configure the Thor VM3 for screen blanking. When routing any additional cables for screen blanking:
Route the cable the shortest way possible removing any left-over cable
Fuses and cabling are user supplied. Therefore, route these cables so they are protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed the cable's rated temperature threshold.
Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts
Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate
Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle.
Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable An optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable is available. DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Wire color 1 -6, 9 7 (RTS) 8 (CTS) Not Used Connected to Screen Blanking Box, unswitched side Black (see note) Connected to Screen Blanking Box, switched side Gray (see note) Note: Wire colors only apply to optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE. Wire colors may vary in a user-supplied cable. The optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE, is installed as follows:
1. Connect the gray wire of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box. 2. Connect the black wire of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box. 3. Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. 4 - 43 User-Supplied Cable A user-supplied cable can be used as well. Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as detailed below. No other pins are to be connected. PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 8 PIN 7 DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Function with Switch 1 -6, 9 7 (RTS) 8 (CTS) Not Used Connected to Screen Blanking Box, unswitched side Connected to Switch Connected to Screen Blanking Box, switched side Connected to Switch Not Used The user-supplied cable is installed as follows:
1. Connect the wire from Pin 8 of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user-sup-
plied switch. 2. Connect the wire from Pin 7 of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user-
supplied switch. 3. Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. Screen Blanking Box Screen Blanking Box Terminal Connection 12-xxV GND Unswitched Switched
Input from vehicle motion sensing circuitry. Please refer to label on Screen Blanking Box for allowable voltage input range. DC -
These two terminals are for connecting a serial cable:
If using an optional Honeywell screen blanking cable, VM1080CABLE, connect the gray wire to the switched side of the connection and connect the black wire to the unswitched side. If using a user-supplied cable, the cable must be constructed so that Pin 7 (RTS) connects to switched side of the connection and Pin 8 (CTS) connects to the unswitched side. It is assumed that the motion sensing circuitry in the illustrations below is powered by internal vehicle circuitry. Please refer to the appropriate illustration below for Screen Blanking Box wiring diagrams.
!
CAUTION - Do not exceed the maximum input voltage, either 60 or 72VDC, specified on the Screen Blanking Box label when using this configuration. 4 - 44 MOTION CIRCUITRY 3A fuse D N G i V
+
To -Vo on vehicle, i.e. Negative battery terminal To pin 7 of COM1 or COM2 To pin 8 of COM1 or COM2 Note: The black and gray wire colors in the illustration only apply to the optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE. The wire colors may be different in a user-supplied cable. Screen Blanking with Switch In applications where it is impractical to use the screen blanking box due to vehicle voltage or lack of a motion sensing signal, screen blanking can be controlled via a user supplied switch or relay that provides an electrical conductive connection on vehicle motion. To pins 7 and 8 of COM1 or COM2 port on dock Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as shown in the illustration above. No other pins are to be connected. 4 - 45 External AC/DC Power Supply The optional external AC/DC power supply is for use in environments, such as an office, where DC power is not avail-
able. Note: The Honeywell-approved AC/DC Power Supply and Adapter Cable are only intended for use in a 25C (77F) maximum ambient temperature environment. In North America, this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC, mini-
mum 15W. Outside North America, this unit is intended for use with an IEC certified ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC, minimum 15W. The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V, 60Hz supply or, outside North America, to a 230V, 50Hz supply, using the appropriate detachable cordset. In all cases, connect to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp overcurrent protection (10 Amp for 230V circuits). AC Input Cable (US only) DC Output Cable To DC Output Cable To Dock Connect External Power Supply 1. Connect the provided detachable cordset (US only, all others must order cable separately) to the external power supply (IEC 320 connector). 2. Plug cordset into appropriate, grounded, electrical supply receptacle (AC mains). 3. Connect the DC Output Cable end to the corresponding connector on the Adapter Cable. 4. Connect the watertight connector end of the Adapter Cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock Power Connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 5. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 6. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 46 Connect USB Host D9 Connector USB Host Connector USB Client Connector See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D9 connector firmly over the USB (or USB1) Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. The USB-host connector provides a connector for a USB device such as a USB thumb drive. 4. Secure the cables to the Thor VM3 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). Connect USB Client D9 Connector USB Host Connector USB Client Connector Connect Serial Device See COM1 and COM2 Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the cable end connector firmly over the serial COM port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Turn the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. Secure the cables to the Thor VM3 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 4. Connect the other cable end to the desired serial device. 4 - 47 Connect a Tethered Scanner 1. The scanner cable is attached to either the COM1 or COM2 port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Connect the serial cable for the scanner as directed above. 3. When the Thor VM3 is powered on, it provides power to the serial scanner. 4. Configure the Data Collection (DC) Wedge to manipulate scanned data as desired. Connect Headset Cable The CANbus/Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus cable. The Thor VM3 does not support con-
necting audio and CANbus simultaneously. To headset To Audio connector on dock Headphones Microphone To Audio cable See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus/Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. click!
3. Slide the cable ends together until they click shut. Do not twist or bend the connectors. The Thor VM3 internal microphone and speakers are automatically disabled when the headset is connected. 4 - 48 Adjust Headset / Microphone and Secure Cable The headset consists of an earpiece, a microphone, a clothing clip and a cable. 1. Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone. The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth. 2. Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth. Note the small Talk label near the mouthpiece. Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth. The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing. 3. Follow the safety guidelines below when wearing the headset. Under Clothing
Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar.
Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head. Over Clothing
Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body.
Tuck the cable under the belt, but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt.
Do not wear the cable on the front of your body. It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects. Connect CANbus Cable The CANbus/Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus Y cable. The Thor VM3 does not support connecting audio and CANbus simultaneously. See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus/Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 (Deutsch) and 9 pin M SAE J1939 (Deutsch) connector. Connect the appropriate cable connector as needed. 4 - 49 Install Remote Antenna Remote antennas are available for the 802.11 WLAN radio, the WWAN radio and the GPS. 802.11 Remote Mount Antenna The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of two brackets
(base plate and right angle), cable, and antenna. Tools are not included. The desired remote antenna bracket is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. The Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna cannot be used by devices with an internal antenna. Components and Mounting Diagram Nut Washer Washer Bracket To antenna Antenna To antenna Bracket To antenna connector on computer 4 - 50 Typical Installation Antenna Mounting Bracket Vehicle Safety Cage Cable Vehicle Mounted Computer Mounting Instructions 1. Attach and secure the desired mounting bracket to the highest point on the safety cage, following these pre-
cautions:
The plate must be mounted so the antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving.
The antenna mounting portion of the bracket must be parallel to the floor.
If using two antennas, they must be mounted at least 12 inches (304.8mm) apart. 2. Attach the female connector of the coaxial cable to the antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 3. Secure the whip antenna to the mounting bracket. 4. Connect the antenna cable to the whip antenna. 5. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. 6. Connect the cable to the antenna connector (Wi-Fi Main or Wi-Fi Aux) on the Thor VM3. If only one antenna is used, be sure to connect it to the Wi-Fi Main connector. 7. Repeat the steps above for the second 802.11 antenna. 4 - 51 WAN Remote Mount Antenna The WAN remote mount antenna can be either a magnetic mount or an adhesive mount antenna. Magnetic Mount WAN Antenna Adhesive Mount WAN Antenna To extension cable To antenna To antenna connector on computer To extension cable To antenna To antenna connector on computer The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the WAN antenna and an extension cable. The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. 1. Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle, following these precautions:
The antenna must be mounted so the antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving. 2. Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted. 3. If using an adhesive mount antenna, remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna. 4. Position the antenna on the vehicle. 5. Attach the one end of the coaxial cable to the antenna and the other end to the Mobile Net WWAN connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 6. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. GPS Remote Mount Antenna The external GPS antenna is an adhesive mount antenna. The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the antenna and an integrated cable. The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. 1. Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle, following these precautions:
The antenna must be mounted so the antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving. 2. Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted. 3. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna and position the antenna on the vehicle. 4. Attach the connector on the coaxial cable to the GPS antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 5. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. 4 - 52 Apply Touch Screen Protective Film The optional Thor VM3 touch screen protective film is shipped in packs of 10. The protective film is flexible and treated with an anti-glare coating on the outer surface. Installation 1. Make sure the touch screen is clean and dry before installation. See Cleaning (page 4-16) for instructions on suitable cleaning agents. 2. Pull the release tab to separate the protective backing from the rear of the protective film. Avoid touching the rear side of the protective film while removing the liner. 3. Place the rear side of the protective film against the Thor VM3 display, roughly centering the protective film over the display. 4. Slide the protective film until one corner can be slid back between the touch screen and the display housing as the protective film is re-centered on the display. It may be necessary to press the edges of the protective film against the display to ensure the entire edge slides under the display housing. It is easiest to start with one of the bottom corners. 5. Slide the protective film away from the other bottom corner. The film may bulge sligthly away from the Reference Guide as it is being slid. Only slide the protective film enough so that the protective film can slide under the display housing on that corner when the protective film is returned to center. 6. Repeat with each of the top corners, sliding the protective film away from the corner just enough that the protective film can slide under the display housing when the protective film is returned to center. 7. It may be necessary to flex the protective film during the install, however use care not to flex the protective film so much that the protective film kinks. 8. Once all corners are secure under the display housing, adjust the protective film, if necessary, so it is centered on the touch screen. Removal 1. To remove the protective film, slide the protective film in one direction until the edge clears. 2. Lift up on the edge of the protective film so it does not slide between the touch screen and display housing when the protective film is slid back to the center. 3. Repeat until all edges are free and remove the protective film. 4 - 53 Disconnect UPS Battery
!
CAUTION - The UPS battery must be disconnected before you ship the Thor VM3 or Replace Front Panel (page 4-58). Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Disconnect Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the small push button located just below the SIM card installation slot. 6. Press the push button to disconnect the UPS. The UPS battery maintains its charge but is disconnected from the power circuitry of the Thor VM3. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the M3 screws to 4-5 inch pounds using a #2 Phillips bit. 8. When the Thor VM3 is attached to external power, the UPS battery is automatically reconnected. 9. Restart the Thor VM3. 4 - 54 Install SD Card An SD card slot is provided for storage expansion. Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
SD card - The following commercially available SD cards are recommended:
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the SD card installation slot. 6. Slide the SD card into the slot. The label side (front) of the SD card faces toward the back of the Thor VM3. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the screws to 4-5 inch pounds. 8. If removed, reinstall the Thor VM3 in the dock. 4 - 55 Install SLC Drive An mSATA card slot is provided for storage expansion. Only mSATA drives are supported.
!
Only mSATA drives are supported. Connector pin 43 is not connected on an mSATA drive.
mPCIe drives are not supported. Connector pin 43 is grounded on an mPCIe drive.
Connecting an mCPIe drive can result in system instability such as a failure to boot or non-functional accessories such as keyboard or mouse. Connecting an mPCIe drive (connector pin 43 is grounded) can cause he Thor VM3 Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds mSATA card - The following commercially available mSATA cards are recommended:
SMART Modular SG9MST3D4GBS01 4 - 56 Install SIM Card A SIM card may be required for WWAN. Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
SIM card for desired carrier
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the SIM card installation slot. 6. Slide the SIM card into the slot. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the screws to 4-5 inch pounds. 8. If removed, reinstall the Thor VM3 in the dock. 4 - 57 Replace Front Panel Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Replacement Procedure
!
CAUTION - Before replacing the Thor VM3 front panel, Disconnect UPS Battery (page 4-54). 9. Carefully lift the front panel away from the device. 10. Gently press the front panel into place. 11. Tighten the captive M3 screws. In the order shown in the top figure above, use a #2 Phillips bit and torque the screws to 6-7 inch pounds. 12. Reinstall the Thor VM3 in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 13. When the Thor VM3 is placed in the powered dock, the UPS battery automatically reconnects. 14. Restart the Thor VM3. 15. Remove the old battery and set it aside. 16. Inspect the battery well to verify the two foam pads are still in place. 17. Align the wiring connector on the new UPS battery with the connector on the Thor VM3. Gently press the connector into place until the retaining tab snaps into place. 18. Place the UPS battery into the well. Note the orientation of the battery in the illustration below. The flat surface of the battery points toward the bottom of the Thor VM3. Make sure all wires are inside the battery well so they are not pinched when the front panel is reinstalled. 4 - 58 5 Software Microsoft Windows Setup and Configuration After the system files are processed, Microsoft Windows begins to load. Windows maintains a System Registry and INI files. Standard Windows configuration options apply to the Thor VM3. Configuration options are located in the System Tray or the Control Panel:
The System Tray contains icons for adjusting the time, date or volume level.
The Control Panel contains icons for many other configuration options, such as Power Management, Regional and Language Options, etc.
The Control Panel icons are also used to add, delete or modify software installed on the Thor VM3. Drive C Folder Structure Microsoft Windows is installed in the \Windows folder. In addition, Microsoft Windows creates other folders and several subfolders. For more information on the folder structure, please refer to commercially available Microsoft Windows OS ref-
erence guides. Software Loaded on Drive C The software loaded on the Thor VM3 computer consists of:
BIOS
Microsoft operating system (Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
device drivers
The software installed on the Thor VM3 is summarized below. Note: Due to the complex folder structure and System Registry under Microsoft Windows, software should not be radio software see Wireless Configuration Utility touch screen software removed manually. Instead use the Windows Control Panel:
Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows is installed in the \Windows subfolder, which is the Windows default. In addition, Windows places files in other folders and subfolders during installation. For more information, please refer to commercially available Microsoft Windows OS user guides. Device Drivers Device drivers are installed for all installed hardware options, such as the display, touch screen, radios, etc. For more information on Microsoft Windows device drivers, please refer to commercially available Windows OS refer-
ence guides. Radio Software The Thor VM3 is delivered with the radio software installed. Because the Thor VM3 uses a Microsoft Windows operating system, the radio installation includes Windows device drivers. Touch Screen Software PenMount Universal software is installed for calibrating the touch screen. See Touch Screen Calibration (page 5-
13) for more information. RFTerm Start > All Programs > Honeywell RFTerm 5 - 1 Optional terminal emulation software. The application can also be accessed by double-clicking the RFTerm desk-
top icon.
!
For Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Embedded 7:
It is necessary to run to run RFTerm as an administrator when modifying settings because RFTerm must be able to access and make changes to the Windows registry. Rather than selecting to run as administrator each time, right click on the RFTerm icon and select Proper-
ties. Tap the Compatibility tab and check Run this program as an administrator. This modification af-
fects the current user only unless Change settings for all users is tapped before changing the privilege level. Summit Client Utility Start > Control Panel > Wi-Fi, or SCU icon on desktop Manage wireless clients installed in the Thor VM3. If the Summit Client Utility is not present, the Laird Configura-
tion Manager may be installed. Laird Configuration Manager LCM icon on desktop Manage wireless clients installed in the Thor VM3. If the Laird Configuration Manager is no present, the Summit Client Utility may be installed. 5 - 2 Control Panel Most control panel applets on the Thor VM3 are standard Microsoft Windows items. The control panels and other functions listed below may differ from a standard Microsoft Windows equipped PC or laptop. About Software Firmware Versions The Software tab lists the firmware versions installed. The BIOS, EC and Screen MCU firmware versions are shown on this tab. Language The Software tab displays the localized language version of the OS image. The language is identified as English or + an additional language. The Thor VM3 may be pre-loaded with an English only OS. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for informa-
tion on ordering a recovery DVD with an additional language. Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all installed software is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the Thor VM3. The Image line displays the revision of the system software installed. Refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level. Versions Tab and the Registry The Versions tab displays program version details from the registry. Customized information can be displayed by modifying the Registry using the Registry Editor. Use caution when editing the Registry and make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. The registry settings for the Version tab are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Version in the reg-
istry. To add a user application to the Version panel, create a new string value under the HKLM\Software\LXE\Version key. The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window. Version strings can be equal to or less than 254 characters. Because the strings are displayed in a text box, any number can be accommodated, up to the 64K byte text box limitation. Network IP 5 - 3 MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the network card(s) such as the Summit WLAN radio and the Bluetooth module. 1. 5 - 4 Display Start > Control Panel > Display (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes (Category View) The Thor VM3 supports a pixel display resolution. Screen Rotation (page 5-11) Screen Blanking (page 5-10) are configured on separate control panels. 5 - 5 Power Options Select a Power Scheme Power Schemes Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Category View) 5 - 6 View UPS Battery Status Power Meter Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Category View) On the Power Meter tab, battery #1 refers to the UPS battery. Shows power status: external power or UPS battery and the total battery power remaining before a recharge is necessary. Configure Power Button Behavior Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Advanced tab (Category View) Advanced The Advanced panel allows setting the power button behavior when the unit is on and the power button is pressed. Options are:
Do nothing
Ask me what to do
Stand by
Shut down. The default is to shut down. The Thor VM3 performs an orderly shut down when the power key is pressed when this option is enabled. 5 - 7 Hibernate Enable Hibernation Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Hibernate tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Hibernate tab (Category View) By default, hibernate is on the Thor VM3. The default can be changed on this page. The disk space necessary for hibernation plus the free disk space on the hard drive are listed. 5 - 8 Screen Control Start > Control Panel > Screen (Classic View) Set screen properties for the Thor VM3. Factory Default Settings Screen Blanking (Blackout) Enable screen blanking Screen on delay (ms) COM Port Current Level LCD Brightness (%) Enabled 1000 COM1 100 (see note) Note: There is no default value for Ambient Light % as it varies depending on the level of light where the Thor VM3 is located. 5 - 9 Screen Blanking Screen blanking allows the Thor VM3 display to automatically be turned off whenever the vehicle is in motion. Use the Screen on delay to specify the period of time in ms (milliseconds) between when the vehicle stops and the Thor VM3 screen turns on. For example, use the delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicles accel-
erator pedal. Release of the accelerator may mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary. Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop. The default value is 1000 ms. Specify the COM Port to which the screen blanking cable is attached. If a COM port is in use by another application, that COM port is grayed out and cannot be selected for screen blanking.
!
Do not enable Screen Blanking until the cable is properly connected to the specified COM port. To disable screen blanking, uncheck the Enable screen blanking checkbox. See Screen Blanking (page 4-53) for hardware requirements. Refer to the wiring instructions, including appropriate cautions and warnings, in the Connect Power (page 4-35) sec-
tion. 5 - 10 Screen Rotation Start > Control Panel > Screen Rotation (Classic view) The Screen Rotation panel provides options for rotating the display:
0 Degree - Returns screen to the default orientation. 90 Degree - Rotates the screen counter clockwise 90 degrees as compared to the default orientation. 180 Degree - Rotates the screen 180 degrees as compared to the default orientation. 270 Degree - Rotates the screen counter clockwise 270 degrees as compared to the default orientation. Select the desired rotation and tap OK. The screen may briefly go blank during the rotation process. Tap Close to dismiss the panel and keep the current screen rotation. Sounds Start > Control Panel > Sounds and Audio Devices (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech and Audio Devices (Category View) Use the slider bar to adjust the volume level as desired. Alternatively:
Tap the Volume icon, if present, in the taskbar and move the slider until the volume level is as desired. User Accounts Note: The following applies to a Thor VM3 that is not part of a domain. When the Thor VM3 is part of a domain, the user is prompted for credentials at Windows startup or log on. The Thor VM3 is pre-configured with an administrator account named Administrator. By default, the Thor VM3 automati-
cally logs onto the Administrator account at Windows startup. If the user assigns a password to the Administrator account:
The password is stored and used when the Thor VM3 logs onto the Administrator account at Windows startup. The user is not prompted to enter a password. If the user logs off, the password must be manually entered to log back onto the Thor VM3.
At the logon prompt, the user could specify a different user account (and password, if necessary) to log on, assuming the account has been added to the Thor VM3. 5 - 11
When the Thor VM3 is restarted, the Administrator account automatically becomes the active user account, regardless of the active account before the restart. If using the Windows Certificate Store (page 6-17) the user must assign a password to the active (Administrator) account. Sounds By default the side tone is muted. If needed, the user should enable the side tone. If this causes interfering noise, the side tone should be disabled. The VM3 audio is designed to be used with or without the side tone. This is acceptable permissi-
ble performance for the Thor VM3. Wi-Fi Start > Control Panel > Wi-Fi (Classic view) Provides a shortcut to access the 802.11a/b/g/n radio configuration utility. Tap the Wi-Fi icon to access the Summit Client Utility (page 6-1). 5 - 12
1 2 3 4 5 | User manua 2 | Users Manual | 1.48 MiB |
Bar Code Readers The Thor VM3 can use the following external bar code readers:
Tethered hand-held scanners are tethered to a serial port or a USB host port (via a dongle cable) on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock and are configured by scanning the engine-specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer's programming guide. The manufacturer's guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader.
Wireless hand-held Bluetooth scanners are configured by scanning the engine-specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer's programming guide. The manufacturer's guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader.
The body worn Bluetooth Ring Scanner module may be using a Symbol 4400 Ring Imager or a Symbol 955 Ring Scanner. The BTRS module is configured by scanning the bar codes in the Bluetooth Ring Scanner Guide. Scanner Wedge Honeywell provides Freefloat Link*One for bar code decoding needs on the Thor VM3. Refer to the Freefloat website for documentation on Freefloat Link*One. Touch Screen Calibration Start > Programs > PenMount Windows Universal Driver To calibrate the touch screen, tap Start > Programs > PenMount Universal Driver > Utility > PenMount Control Panel. Select PenMount 6000 USB and then tap Configure. Select Standard Calibration or Advance Calibration. Advanced Calibration allows the user to select the number of calibration points. With either option, follow the on screen instructions to touch the red square, hold the touch and then lift the stylus to complete the calibration process. 5 - 13 BIOS The Microsoft Windows operating system is installed before shipping. The default BIOS parameters are configured at that time. In most cases, it is unnecessary to modify the BIOS parameters. Generally, it is only necessary to enter the BIOS setup to change the boot order of the drives. This section is not intended to detail all features of the BIOS, instead it is intended to cover the most commonly used setup options.
!
CAUTION - Be very careful when using this utility to modify BIOS Setup parameters. The Thor VM3 may generate unex-
pected results when incorrect or conflicting parameter values are entered. Selecting incorrect or invalid options may re-
quire the Thor VM3 to be returned for repairs. The parameters should only be modified by Information Services personnel or the system administrator. Accessing the BIOS Setup When the Embedded BIOS screen (Phoenix Technologies) is displayed press the Del key to enter BIOS setup. Use the arrow keys to move around the screen. To access and modify the BIOS on the Thor VM3, an external keyboard must be attached. Boot Order To view or edit the boot order, select the Boot tab. By default, the first device in the boot order is USB Hard Drive. The second device is the Windows CE Image.
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive:
If the USB drive contains a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 boots from the USB drive. If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 does not boot. Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM3 again. Exiting BIOS Setup To exit the BIOS setup, select the Exit tab and select one of these options:
Save Setting and Restart
Exit Setup without Saving Changes
Reload Factory-Defaults and Restart Thor VM3 Recovery DVD A recovery DVD is available to restore the operating system on your Thor VM3 to the same state it had when it was shipped from the factory. The recovery DVD may not reload all factory installed software. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for information on the recovery DVD and for assistance installing other factory loaded software.
5 - 14 Windows Embedded Standard 2009 1. Locate the CCU icon either on the desktop or by selecting 2. Double-tap the icon to launch the CCU. Windows Embedded Standard 7 and Windows 7 Professional:
3. 4. Using Configuration Cloning Utility GUI 5 - 15 5 - 16 6 Wireless Network Connections Network Connections Control Panel For best results, do not use the Network Connections panel (Start > Control Panel > Network Connections) to disable the Summit wireless adapter. Due to a limitation of the system architecture, if the Summit wireless adapter is disabled in the Net-
work Connections panel, it cannot be re-enabled from this control panel. Instead, the Thor VM3 must be rebooted to enable the Summit wireless adapter. The Device Manager (Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager) can be used to disable and enable the Summit wireless adapter without rebooting the Thor VM3. Summit Wireless Network Configuration The Summit client device is a Summit 802.11a/b/g/n radio, capable of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n data rates. The radio can be configured for no encryption, WEP encryption or WPA security. Security Options Supported are Important Notes It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certifi-
cates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
!
It may be necessary to upgrade radio software in order to use certain Summit Client Utility (SCU) features. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for details. When using the 802.11a radio, the U-NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation. For regulatory domains in which the U-NII 3 band is allowed, the following channels are supported: 149, 153, 157 and 161. The AP must be con-
figured accordingly. After making any changes to the wireless configuration, restart the Thor VM3. Summit Client Utility Note: When making changes to profile or global parameters, the device should be restarted afterwards. Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility or SCU Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon (if present) or Wi-FI Icon in the Windows Control Panel (if present) The Main tab provides information, admin login and active profile selection. Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab. The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile. The Status tab contains information on the current connection. The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio. Global parameters are found on the Global tab. The values for these parameters apply to all profiles. Summit Tray Icon The Summit tray icon is not shown when the Thor VM3 is running Windows Embedded Standard 2009. The Windows Wireless icon (located in the taskbar) may not display a successful wireless connection. The SCU Main tab should be used to verify the success of the connection instead. 6 - 1 Wireless Zero Config Utility
The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar indicating the Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time (the device is not connected to a network). The WZC icon may not be visible until control is passed to the WZC utility as described below.
You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. The Summit Client Utility is recommended because the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio. To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility 1. Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down box on the Main tab. 2. A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly. 3. Tap OK. 4. Restart the Thor VM3. The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel. Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels, set up radio and security settings. There may be a slight delay before the Wireless Zero Config icon indicates the status of the connection. To Switch Control to SCU 1. To switch back to SCU control, select any other profile except ThirdPartyConfig in the SCU Active Config drop down list on the Main tab. 2. A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly. 3. Tap OK. 4. Restart the Thor VM3. Radio control is passed to the SCU. 6 - 2 Main Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Main tab Factory Default Settings Admin Login Radio Active Config/Profile Regulatory Domain SUMMIT Enabled Default FCC, ETSI or Worldwide The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including:
SCU (Summit Client Utility) version
Driver version
Radio Type (ABGN is an 802.11 a/b/g/n radio).
Regulatory Domain
Copyright Information can be accessed by tapping the About SCU button
Active Config profile / Active Profile name
Status of the client (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc.). The Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode. Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Administrator mode. The profile must already exist. Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin login password has been entered and accepted. When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile, the Summit Client Utility passes control to Wire-
less Manager for configuration of all client and security settings for the network module. The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the network card. Once disabled, the button label changes to Enable Radio. By default the radio is enabled. The Admin Login button provides access to editing wireless parameters. Profile and Global may only be edited after enter-
ing the Admin Login password. The password is case-sensitive. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. To logout, either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button. Admin Login To login to Administrator mode, tap the Admin Login button. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited. The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button, or the OK button to logout. 6 - 3 Enter the Admin password (the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive) and tap OK. If the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed. The Administrator default password can be changed on the tab. The end-user can:
Turn the radio on or off on the Main tab.
Select an active Profile on the Main tab.
View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab.
View the global parameter settings on the Global tab.
View the current connection details on the Status tab.
View radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab.
Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab. After Admin Login, the end-user can also:
Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab.
Edit global parameters on the Global tab.
Enable/disable the Summit tray icon in the taskbar. 6 - 4 Profile Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Profile tab Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Factory Default Settings Profile SSID Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate Radio Mode Auth Type EAP Type Encryption Default Blank Blank CAM Maximum Auto BGA rates full Open None None When logged in as an Admin use the Profile tab to manage profiles. When not logged in as an Admin, the parameters can be viewed, and cannot be changed. The buttons on this tab are dimmed if the user is not logged in as Admin. The Profile tab was previously labeled Config. Buttons Button Commit Credentials Delete New Rename Function Saves the profile settings made on this screen. Settings are saved in the profile. Allows entry of a username and password, certificate names, and other information required to authen-
ticate with the access point. The information required depends on the EAP type. Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted. Creates a new profile with the default settings (see Profile Parameters) and prompts for a unique name. If the name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created. Assigns a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed. 6 - 5 Button Scan Function Opens a window that lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs. Tap the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs. Each APs SSID, its received signal strength indication (RSSI) and whether or not data encryption is in use (true or false). Sort the list by tapping on the column headers. If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID, the list displays the AP with the strongest RSSI and the least security. If you are logged in as an Admin, tap an SSID in the list and tap the Configure button, you return to the Profile window to recreate a profile for that SSID, with the profile name being the same as the SSID (or the SSID with a suffix such as _1 if a profile with the SSID as its name exists already). Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption. WEP Keys /
PSK Keys Note: Unsaved Changes The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from this tab. Important The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen. Profile Parameters Parameter Explanation Default Edit Profile Default SSID Client Name Blank Blank Power Save CAM A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters, establishes the name of the Profile. Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig. A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Establishes the Service Set Iden-
tifier (SSID) of the WLAN to which the client connects. A string of up to 16 characters. The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card. The client name may be passed to net-
working wireless devices, e.g. Access Points. Power save mode. Options are: Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) power save off, Maximum (power saving mode) and Fast (power saving mode). When using power management, use FAST for best throughput results. Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current Auto Open None regulatory domain. Options are: Maximum, 50mW, 30mW, 20mW, 10mW, 5mW, or 1mW. Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the client device. Options are: Auto, 1 Mbit, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit. 802.11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point. Options are: Open, LEAP, or Shared key. Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used for 802.1x authentication to the Access Point. Options are: None, LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, PEAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS. EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop-up window. Tx Power Bit Rate Auth Type EAP Type 6 - 6 Parameter Encryption Default Explanation None Radio Mode BGA Rates Full Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data. Available options may vary by SCU version. Options are: None, WEP (or Manual WEP), WEP EAP (or Auto WEP), WPA PSK, WPA TKIP, WPA CCKM, WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, or WPA2 CCKM. CKIP is not supported in the Thor VM3. Note: The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP Keys / PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop-up window. Specify 802.11a, 802.11b and/or 802.11g rates when communicating with the AP. The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio in-
stalled in the mobile device. Options:
B rates only (1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps) BG Rates Full (All B and G rates) G rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) BG optimized or BG subset (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 24, 36 and 54 Mbps) A rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) ABG Rates Full (All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred) BGA Rates Full (All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred) Ad Hoc (when connecting to another client device instead of an AP) Default:
BGA Rates Full It is important the Radio Mode parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect. For example, if this parameter is set to G rates only, the Thor VM3 may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates. 6 - 7 Status Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Status tab This screen provides information on the radio:
The profile being used.
The status of the radio card (down, associated, authenticated, etc.).
Client information including device name, IP address and MAC address.
Information about the Access Point (AP) maintaining the connection to the network including AP name, IP address and MAC address.
Channel currently being used for wireless traffic.
Bit rate in Mbit.
Current transmit power in mW.
Beacon period the time between AP beacons in kilomicroseconds. (one kilomicrosecond = 1,024 microseconds).
DTIM interval A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them. For example, if DTIM = 3, then every third beacon contains a DTIM.
Signal strength (RSSI) displayed in dBm and graphically.
Signal quality, a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and graphically. There are no user entries on this screen. Note: After completing radio configuration, it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as indicated above. 6 - 8 Diags Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Diags tab The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues.
(Re)connect Use this button to apply (or reapply) the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen.
Release/Renew Obtain a new IP address through release and renew. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio, this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button.
Start Ping Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button. Once the button is clicked, the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping. Clicking the button ends the ping. The ping also ends when any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags tab. The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box.
Diagnostics Also attempts to (re)connect to the wireless LAN. However, this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the (Re)connect option. This data dump includes radio state, profile settings, global settings, and a list of broadcast SSID APs.
Save To Use this to save the results of the diagnostics to a text file. Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file. The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad. 6 - 9 Global Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Global tab The parameters on this panel can only be changed when an with a password. The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password. Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Factory Default Settings
-65 dBm 5 dBm 10 sec. Full Off 120 ms. 1 On Optimized On Type 1 Auto-EAP Standard Off (dimmed) On On Start on Main 2346 2347 Off On On SUMMIT (or blank) 8 seconds C:\Program Files\Summit\certs 32 bytes 5000 ms 1000 ms Use SCU credentials Roam Trigger Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set DFS Channels DFS Scan Time Ad Hoc Channel Aggressive Scan CCX Features WMM Auth Server TTLS Inner Method PMK Caching WAPI TX Diversity RX Diversity Frag Threshold RTS Threshold LED Tray Icon Hide Passwords Admin Password Auth Timeout Certs Path Ping Payload Ping Timeout Ping Delay ms Logon Options 6 - 10 Custom Parameter Option The parameter value is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a value that is not available from the parameters drop down list. Selecting Custom from the drop down list has no effect. Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the custom value in the registry. Global Parameters Parameter Function Default Roam Trigger
-65 dBm Roam Delta 5 dBm Roam Period 10 sec. BG Channel Set Full DFS Channels Off DFS Scan Time 120 ms. Ad Hoc Channel 1 If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the client looks for a dif-
ferent Access Point with a stronger signal. Options are: -50 dBm, -55, -60, -65, -70, -75, -80, -85, -90 dBm or . The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must ex-
ceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the dif-
ferent Access Point is attempted. Options are: 5 dBm, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 dBm or Custom. The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam, that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) scan data before a roaming decision is made. Options are: 5 sec, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 seconds or Custom. Defines the 2.4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming. By specifying the channels to search, roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels. Options are:
Full (all channels) 1,6,11 (the most commonly used channels) 1,7,13 (for ETSI and TELEC radios only) or Custom. Support for 5GHZ 802.11a channels where support for DFS is required. Options are: On, Off, Optimized. Not supported (always off) in some releases. ABG radio only. The amount of time the radio will passively scan each DFS channel to see if it will receive a beacon. Recommended value is 1.5 times that of the AP's beacon period. Use this parameter when the Radio Mode profile parameter is set to Ad Hoc. Specifies the channel to be used for an Ad Hoc connection to another cli-
ent device. If a channel is selected that is not supported by the by the ra-
dio, the default value is used. Options are:
1 through 14 (the 2.4GHz channels) 36, 40, 44, 48 (the UNII-1 channels) 6 - 11 Parameter Default Function When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens, the radio aggressively scans for available APs. Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning (set through Roam Trigger, Roam Delta and Roam Period). Aggressive scanning should be set to On unless there is significant co-channel interference due to over-
lapping APs on the same channel. Options are: On, Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features. Options are:
Full - Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features. The option known as On in previous versions. Optimized Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX fea-
tures except AP assisted roaming, AP specified maximum transmit pow-
er and radio management. Off - Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version number. Cisco IE = Cisco Information Element. Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions. Devices running Windows XP can change the default value. Devices run-
ning all other OS cannot change the default value. Specifies the type of authentication server. Options are: Type 1 (ACS server) and Type 2 (non-ACS server) Authentication method used within the secure tunnel created by EAP-
TTLS. Options are:
AUTO-EAP (Any available EAP method), MSCHAPV2, MSCHAP, PAP CHAP, EAP-MSCHAPV2 Type of Pairwise Master Key (PMK) caching to use when WPA2 is in use. PMK caching is designed to speed up roaming between APs by al-
lowing the client and the AP to cache the results of 802.1X authentica-
tions, eliminating the need to communicate with the ACS server. Standard PMK is used when there are no controllers. The reauthentica-
tion information is cached on the original AP. The client and the AP use the cached information to perform the four-way handshake to exchange keys. Opportunistic PMK (OPMK) is used when there are controllers. The reauthentication information cached on the controllers. The client and the controller behind the AP use the cached information to perform the four-way handshake to exchange keys. If the selected PMK caching method is not supported by the network in-
frastructure, every roam requires full 802.11X authentication, including interaction with the ACS server. If the active profile is using WPA2 CCKM, the global PMK Caching set-
ting is ignored and the client attempts to use CCKM. Options are: Standard, OPMK Default is Off and dimmed (cannot be changed). How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point. Options are: Main only, and On. How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Access Point. Option is: On-start on Main This parameter cannot be changed for some Summit radios. If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold, the packet is fragmented (sent as several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas where communica-
tion is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interference. Options are: Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes. Aggressive Scan On CCX or CCX Features Optimized WMM On Auth Server Type 1 TTLS Inner Method Auto-EAP PMK Caching Standard WAPI TX Diversity RX Diversity Off On On Start on Main Frag Thresh 2346 6 - 12 Parameter RTS Thresh Default 2347 LED Tray Icon Hide Password Off On On Admin Password SUMMIT
(or Blank) Auth Timeout 8 seconds Certs Path certificates Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout ms 5000 Ping Delay ms Logon Options 1000 SCU Function If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Re-
quest to Send (RTS) threshold, an RTS is sent before sending the pack-
et. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point. This parameter cannot be changed. The LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device. Options are: On, Off. Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray. Options are: On, Off The tray icon is not displayed when the Thor VM3 is running a Windows Embedded Standard 2009 operating system. When On, the Summit Config Utility masks passwords (characters on the screen are displayed as an *) as they are typed and when they are viewed. When Off, password characters are not masked. Options are: On, Off. A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped. If Hide Password is On, the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry dialog box. The password is case sensitive. This value is masked when the Admin is logged out. Options are: none. Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail. If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the association fails. No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed. If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the user is again prompted to enter the cre-
dentials. Options are: An integer from 3 to 60. A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where WPA Certificate Au-
thority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device when not using the Windows certificates store. Ensure the Windows folder path ex-
ists before assigning the path in this parameter. See Certificates (page 6-32) for instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates. This value is masked when the Admin is logged out. Options are: none. The complete path is C:\Program Files\Summit\certs Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping. Options are: 32 bytes, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 bytes. The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be continuously pinged. The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. The amount of time, in milliseconds, between each ping after a Start Ping button tap. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. Use SCU or Windows login credentials. Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes. If this panel is closed before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Logon Options There are two options available, a Single Signon (page 6-14) option which uses the Windows username and password as the credentials for 802.1x authentication and a Pre-Logon Connection (page 6-14) option which uses saved creden-
tials for 802.1x authentication before Windows logon. 6 - 13 If either option is enabled, the credentials entered here take precedence over any credentials entered on the profile tab. To use either option, select Logon Options from the Property list which activates the Logon Options button. Click the Logon Options button. Single Signon To use the Single Signon option, select the checkbox for Use the Windows username and password when available. When the active profile is using LEAP, PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC or EAP-FAST, the SCU ignores the username and password, if any, saved in the profile. Instead, the username and password used for Windows logon is used. Any certificates needed for authentication must still be specified in the profile. Click OK then click Commit. Pre-Logon Connection To use the Pre_logon connection, select the checkbox for Enable pre-logon connection. This option is designed to be used when:
EAP authentication is required for a WLAN connection
Single Signon is configured, so the Windows username and password are used as credentials for EAP authentication
The WLAN connection needs to be established before the Windows login. Once this option is enabled, the Authentication delay and Association timeout values can be adjusted as nec-
essary. Both values are specified in milliseconds (ms). The default authentication delay is 5000 ms and the valid range is 0 - 600,000 ms. The default association timeout is 10,000 ms and the valid range is 10,000 to 600,000 ms. Click on the Credentials button to enter the logon credentials. 6 - 14 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit Client Utility offers these choices:
The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this method is selected, anyone using the device can access the network.
The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign on screen is displayed. The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate.
When using Summit with the Thor VM3, there is an option on the Global tab to use the Windows user name and password to log on instead of any username and password stored in the profile. To Use Stored Credentials 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. 2. Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button. 3. Click the Commit button. 4. For LEAP and WPA/LEAP, configuration is complete. 5. For PEAP-MSCHAP and PEAP-GTC, importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional. 6. For EAP-TLS, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 7. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 8. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 9. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 10. If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning, input the PAC filename and password. 11. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 6 - 15 12. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters. 13. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. Note: See Configuring the Profile (page 6-18) for more details. Note:
If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials, the authentication will fail. No error message is displayed. The user may or may not be prompted to enter valid credentials. To Use Sign On Screen 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. Leave the Username and Password blank. No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or LEAP/WPA. 2. For PEAP-MSCHAP and PEAP-GTC, importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional. 3. For EAP-TLS, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 4. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 5. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 6. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 7. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 8. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed. 9. Enter the Username and Password. Click the OK button. 10. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. 11. The sign-on screen is displayed after a reboot. Note: See Configuring the Profile (page 6-18) for more details. If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK, the device associates but does not authenticate. The user is again prompted to enter credentials. If the user clicks the Cancel button, the device does not associate. The user is not prompted again for credentials until:
the device is rebooted,
the radio is disabled then enabled, the Reconnect button on the is clicked or
the profile is modified and the Commit button is clicked.
To Use Windows Username and Password Please see Logon Options (page 6-13) for information. 6 - 16 Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
If using the Windows Certificate Store, the Windows Account must have a password. The password cannot be left blank. The Summit Client Utility uses the Windows user account credentials to access the Certificate Store. The Windows user account credentials need not be the same as the credentials entered in the Summit Client Utility. User Certificates EAP-TLS authentication requires a user certificate. The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store.
To generate the user certificate, see Generate a User Certificate (page 6-35).
To import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store, see Install a User Certificate (page 6-37).
A Root CA certificate is also needed. Refer to the section below. Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for EAP/TLS, PEAP/GTC and PEAP/MSCHAP. Two options are offered for storing these certificates. They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory. Certs Path 1. See Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a PC. 2. Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device. The default location for Certs Path is C:\Program Files\Summit\certs. A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable. 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert text box. 5. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. Windows Certificate Store 1. See Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a PC. 2. To import the certificate into the Windows store, See Install a Root CA Certificate (page 6-34). 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, be sure to check the Use MS store check-
box after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. The default is to use all certificates in the store. If this is OK, skip to the last step. 5. Otherwise, to select a specific certificate click on the Browse () button. 6 - 17 6. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 7. Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert text box. 8. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. Configuring the Profile Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network. The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions. Please see your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements. To begin the configuration process:
On the Main click the Admin Login button and enter the password.
If using a single profile, edit the default profile with the parameters for your network. Select the Default profile from the pull-
down menu.
Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the changes. IMPORTANT Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved. Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the tab in focus if there are unsaved changes. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit to save those changes first before making any additional changes. 6 - 18 No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to None 4. Set Auth Type to Open Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 19 WEP To connect using WEP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to WEP or Manual WEP (depending on SCU version) 4. Set Auth Type to Open Click the WEP keys/PSKs button. Valid keys are 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters (for 40-bit encryption) or 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters (for 128-bit encryption). Enter the key(s) and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 20 LEAP To use LEAP (without WPA, also called WEP-LEAP), make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to LEAP 3. Set Encryption to WEP EAP or Auto WEP (depending on SCU version) 4. Set Auth Type as follows:
5. 6. 7. If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open. If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared. If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 21 PEAP/MSCHAP To use PEAP/MSCHAP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network.
For Stored Credentials, User, Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab. See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on certificate storage. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. 6 - 22 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 23 PEAP/GTC To use PEAP/GTC, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to PEAP-GTC 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab. See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on certificate storage. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. Note: Some servers may be configured to allow only a single use of the password for PEAP/GTC. In this case, wait for the token to update with a new password before attempting to validate the server. Then enter the new password, check the Validate Server checkbox and proceed with the certificate process below. 6 - 24 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/GTC for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 25 WPA/LEAP To use WPA/LEAP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to LEAP 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type as follows:
5. 6. 7. If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open. If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared. If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP. To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Click OK then click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 26 EAP-FAST To use EAP-FAST, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. The SCU supports EAP-FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning. With automatic PAC provisioning, the user cre-
dentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the Thor VM3. For automatic PAC provisioning, once a username/password is authenticated, the PAC information is stored on the Thor VM3. The same username/password must be used to authenticate each time. See the note below for more details. For manual PAC provisioning, the PAC filename and Password must be entered. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials (stored or sign on) and the type of PAC pro-
visioning (automatic or manual). Click on the Credentials button. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials with auto-
matic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. To use Sign-On credentials:
Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. To use Stored Credentials:
6 - 27
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Enter the password. To use Automatic PAC Provisioning:
No additional entries are required. To use manual PAC Provisioning:
Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password.
The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable. The PAC file must not be read only. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: When using Automatic PAC Provisioning, once authenticated, there is a file stored in the C:\Program Files\Summit\certs directory with the PAC credentials. If the username is changed, that file must be deleted. The filename is autoP.00.pac. 6 - 28 EAP-TLS To use EAP-TLS, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to EAP-TLS 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name when connecting to the network.
For Stored Credentials, User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Select a user certificate from the Windows certificate store. Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certifi-
cate store. Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button. The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box. Some versions of the SCU require a User Cert password. If this entry field is present, enter the password for the user certif-
icate in the User Cert pwd box. If there are no user certificates in the Windows certificate store, follow these instructions for Generate a User Certificate
(page 6-35) and Install a User Certificate (page 6-37). See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on CA certificate storage. Check the Validate server checkbox. 6 - 29 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The Thor VM3 should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP-TLS for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. See Certificates (page 6-32) for information on generating a Root CA certificate or a User certificate. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 30 WPA PSK To connect using WPA/PSK, make sure the following profile options are used:
1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 4. Set Auth Type to Open Click the WEP keys/PSKs button. This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value. Enter the key and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 31 Certificates Note: Please refer to the Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for communication. Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
If using the Windows Certificate Store, the Windows Account must have a password. The password cannot be left blank. The Summit Client Utility uses the Windows user account credentials to access the Certificate Store. The Windows user account credentials need not be the same as the entered in the Summit Client Utility. Quick Start Root Certificates are necessary for EAP-TLS, PEAP/GTC and PEAP/MSCHAP. 1. Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) either from the Thor VM3 or using a PC. 2. 3. If a PC was used to request the certificate, copy the certificate to the Thor VM3. Install a Root CA Certificate (page 6-34). User Certificates are necessary for EAP-TLS 1. Generate a User Certificate (page 6-35)either from the Thor VM3 or using a PC. 2. If a PC was used to request the certificate, copy the certificate to the Thor VM3. Install a User Certificate (page 6-37). 3. Generate a Root CA Certificate Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC or the Thor VM3 to navigate to the Certificate Authority. To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to http://<CA IP address>/certsrv. Sign into the CA with any valid username and password. 6 - 32 Click the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL link. Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box. Click the DER button. To download the CA certificate, click on the Download CA certificate link. 6 - 33 Click the Save button and save the certificate. Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate. Next install the certificate on the Thor VM3. Install a Root CA Certificate Note: This section is only if the Windows certificate store is used. If the certificate store is not used, copy the certificate to the C:\Program Files\Summit\certs folder or other path specified in the Summit Certs global parameter. Copy the certificate file to theThor VM3. The certificate file has a .CER extension. Locate the file and double-tap on it. If presented with a security warning, confirm that you want to open the file. If the Certificate Wizard does not start automatically when you double-tap the certificate .CER file:
1. Select Start > Run and type certmgr.msc in the text box and tap OK (Windows Embedded Standard 2009 only). 2. In the left pane, right-click Trusted Root Certificate Authorities and select All Tasks > Import. 3. The Certificate Import Wizard starts. 4. Tap Next and use the Browse.. button to locate the Root certificate copied to the Thor VM3 then tap Open. 5. The certificate filename and path are displayed. Tap Next. Tap the Install Certificate button. The certificate import wizard starts. Tap Next. 6 - 34 Generate a User Certificate The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use the browser on the Thor VM3 or a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority. To request the user certificate, open a browser to http://<CA IP address>/certsrv. Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device. This process saves a user certificate file. There is no separate private key file as used on Windows CE devices. Click the Request a certificate link. Click on the User Certificate link. 6 - 35 Click on the Submit button. if there is a message box asking if you want to confirm the request, click Yes. The User Certificate is issued. Install the user certificate on the requesting computer by clicking the Install this certificate link. If the requesting computer is the Thor VM3, then the process is finished. otherwise, export the certificate as described below. Exporting a User Certificate Select Tools > Internet Options > Content and click the Certificates button. Make sure the Personal tab is selected. Highlight the certificate and click the Export button. The Certificate Export Wizard is started Select Yes, export the private key and click Next. 6 - 36 Uncheck Enable strong protection and check Next. The certifi-
cate type must be PKCS #12 (.PFX). When the private key is exported, you must enter the password, confirm the password and click Next. Be sure to remember the password as it is needed when installing the certificate. Supply the file name for the certificate. Use the Browse button to select the folder where you wish to store the certificate. The certif-
icate is saved with a .PFX extension. Click Finish. and OK to close the Successful Export message. Locate the User Certificate in the specified location. Copy to the Thor VM3. Install the User certificate. Install a User Certificate After generating and exporting the user certificate, install the user certificate. 1. Copy the certificate from the PC to the Thor VM3. 2. Locate the certificate file (it has a .PFX extension) and double-click on it. If clicking on the certificate file does not launch the certificate import wizard, follow the Manually Initiate Certificate Installation (page 6-38) before continuing the instructions below. 3. The certificate import wizard starts. Tap Next. 4. Confirm the certificate file name and location. 5. Tap Next. 6. You are prompted for the password that was assigned when the certificate was exported. 7. It is not necessary to select either of the checkboxes displayed above. 8. Enter the password and tap Next. 9. On the next screen, allow Windows to automatically select the certificate store, then click Next and Finish. An import successful message is displayed. 6 - 37 Manually Initiate Certificate Installation If the Certificate Wizard does not start automatically when you double-tap the certificate .PFX file:
1. Select Start > Run and type certmgr.msc in the text box and tap OK. 2. In the left pane, right-click Personal and select All Tasks > Import. 3. The Certificate Import Wizard starts. 4. Tap Next and use the Browse.. button to locate the User certificate copied to the Thor VM3. If necessary, change the file type drop down list at the bottom of the explorer window from *.cer to *.pfx. After selecting the .PFX file, tap Open. 5. The certificate filename and path are displayed. Tap Next. 6. Return to the installation instructions above. 6 - 38 Internet connection management OneClick Internet This section contains the User Manual for the customized version of WebToGo's OneClick Internet for the Honeywell Thor VM3. OneClick Internet is installed by Honeywell on all Thor VM3s equipped with a WWAN radio. Available carriers and OneClick fea-
tures may vary by device. OneClick Internet provides:
Email download
SMS Management
Contact management for SIM and Microsoft Outlook
GPS Management Since WebToGo OneClick Internet is preinstalled, it is present on the Windows Start Menu. A desktop icon is also provided.
!
Honeywell does not recommend using standby on the Thor VM3 while the WWAN connection is active. When exiting standby, a delay of one minute or more may occur as the WWAN radio reads firmware files and initializes before recon-
necting. If this delay is acceptable to the user, standby may be enabled. When the One Click Internet utility is displayed on screen and the Thor VM3 enters standby, the touch screen may remain inactive for 10-15 seconds after the Thor VM3 resumes from standby. Preparing for Initial Use on the Thor VM3 Install SIM Card If using a CDMA carrier such as Verizon, skip this step because a SIM card is not used. Install SIM Card (page 4-57) in the Thor VM3. Load Firmware While the OneClick Internet utility is preinstalled, it is necessary to load the GOBI radio firmware for your selected car-
rier such as AT&T, T-Mobile or Verizon. Note: For carriers requiring a SIM card, the firmware may automatically be selected when a SIM card is installed in the Thor VM3. Double-tap the OneClick Internet icon on the Thor VM3 desktop. Tap the Settings button and select the Firmware tab. Select the firmware for your carrier from the list and tap Change. For more details, see OneClick Internet Connection Manager (page 6-56) and the Firmware (page 6-48) tab. Activation This step is only necessary for Verizon. You need the IMEI number for the Thor VM3 when you contact Verizon prior to activating service on the Thor VM3. The IMEI number can be found on the Info (page 6-48) tab. The activation screen is displayed automatically after the Verizon firmware is selected. If the activation screen is not automatically displayed, double-tap the OneClick Internet icon on the desktop. Select Settings > General tab and tap the Activate button. 6 - 39 Make sure Automated Activation is selected and tap Next. Tap Next to complete the activation. Once the activation is completed, OneClick Internet may be minimized to the tray. To verify your settings, tap on the OneClick Internet icon in the system tray. Tap Settings. Tap the Network tab. 6 - 40 This screen contains the settings including the telephone number from the provider, in this case Verizon. Using OneClick Internet If OneClick Internet is not loaded, double-tap the desktop icon to load it. If OneClick Internet is loaded but minimized to the system tray, tap the OneClick Internet icon in the system tray to maximize it. Connection Management 1. Launch the OneClick Internet Connection Manager and wait until the status icon is blue indicating ready. 2. If there is a problem, verify the SIM card is installed (AT&T, T-Mobile only), the proper firmware has been loaded, etc. 3. If PIN security is used, a popup window prompts for the SIM PIN. 4. Create a connection profile on the Settings menu. 5. Tap the Connect button. The signal strength is indicated as well as the name of the mobile network you are using and the status of the WWAN device. Tap the Disconnect button to end the session. 6 - 41 Menu Buttons Radio Button The Radio button allows you to switch the WWAN radio on and off to save power or to disable the radio in instances where it is not desired (such as during airplane travel). When the radio is switched off, the button is red. When on, it is green. If the radio is disabled by a hardware switch or if the device is not available, the button is disabled and is light gray/white. Statistics Button The Statistics area provides advanced information about the connection. Values displayed are approximate. Tap the Statistics button to enable the statistics viewing area, which is below the main area. When the statistics are displayed, tapping the Statistics button again hides the statistics viewing area. Data In:
Data Out:
Total:
Speed:
Max. Speed:
Time:
The amount of data received during the current connection. The amount of data sent during the current connection. The total amount of data transferred during the current connection. The current data transfer rate. The maximum data transfer rate during this connection. The duration of the current connection. Update Button OneClick Internet provides a built-in online update functionality that allows for an automatic update of OneClick Internet application, device drivers, and APN database. Honeywell DOES NOT recommend using this option. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) or information on upgrading to another version of OneClick Internet. The update is triggered by pressing the update button. The application will check the WebToGo server, if updates are available, and offer them for download if suitable. In order to start the update, select a file from the list of available updates and tap OK. Help Button OneClick Internet includes online help that can be accessed by tapping the Help button. 6 - 42 Settings Button Access the Settings menu by tapping the Settings button on the main window. The following tabs are available:
Profile
Network
History
PIN
Info
Firmware
General Profile Create a connection profile to store connection information. Once a profile has been created, its name appears in the drop down Profiles list, which replaces the Profile Name text box in the illustration above. 6 - 43 Buttons Button Description Create a new profile. When this option is selected, the Profile Name is a text box. Enter a name for the profile as well as other connection specific configuration. When finished, tap the Save button to save the new profile. Edit a current profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to edit the profile parameters. When finished, tap the Save button to save the profile changes. Delete a profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to delete the profile Save a profile. Save a new profile or save changes made when editing a profile. Set Profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to make it the active profile used for connection. Parameters Label Profile Name APN Username Password DNS Proxy Set-
tings Description Profile name - Assign a unique name for each profile. Access Point Name of the network operator. Contact your network operator for more informa-
tion When you are using a CDMA network, the APN field does not appear. Username. Contact your network operator for more information Password. Contact your network operator for more information Domain Name Server. Contact your network operator for more information. When Use Automatic DNS-settings is selected, no additional DNS entries are required. Oth-
erwise, enter the DNS addresses. Proxy Settings for your network. Contact your network operator for more information. When Use Proxy Server is selected, no additional proxy entries are required. Otherwise, enter the Proxy and the Port. 6 - 44 Network The appearance of the network tab depends on the type of firmware selected. Network with SIM Card Select Connection Label Select automatically Use GPRS/EDGE only Use UMTS/HSPA only Description Selects the best suited network automatically Use only GPRS/EDGE for a connection Use only UMTS/HSPA for a connection. Select and tap Apply. A Network changed successfully message is displayed. Close the tab and view the signal strength icon in the main window. Once the signal strength is displayed, you can establish a connection. Select Network Use this option to select from available networks. Note: When you are registered to a CDMA network, you cannot select the network. All CDMA network is shown instead. Note: The network list only appears if the connection setting is Only use GPRS or Only use UMTS/
HSPA. Select the network and tap on the register button. If the change is successful you will see the message Network changed successfully. This item is useful when traveling . Automatic mode selects the preferred network of your network opera-
tor. If enabled, Network Selection displays a list of network options. 1. Automatic Selection 2. Retrieving Networks.. The currently registered network is marked. 6 - 45 CDMA Network Information on the CDMA network is displayed. There are no editable parameters on this screen. History The history shows the data volume transferred in a specified time frame. Select the From and To dates to see the data volume sent/received in the specified period. Tap Reset to reset the counter. 6 - 46 PIN You can Activate/Deactivate the PIN or Change the PIN. Activate/Deactivate PIN This tab is only displayed when a firmware is loaded that requires a SIM card (such as AT&T or T-Mobile). By default, you have to enter the PIN each time you start WebToGo OneClick Internet using a modem card. Deactivate the PIN to avoid entering the PIN each time. Change PIN This dialog lets you change your PIN. Label Current PIN New PIN Verify PIN Description Enter the current PIN. Enter the new PIN. Verify the new PIN by entering it again. 6 - 47 Info This tab displays SIM card, modem and system Information. Firmware OneClick Internet selects the correct Firmware matching your operator automatically, if a special firmware for your operator is available and a SIM card is inserted. If no specific firmware for your operator is available, generic firm-
ware is selected. After a firmware has been selected, it appears as the Current Profile. 6 - 48 You can manually load your desired firmware. Select a new firmware manually by clicking the Select New Profile dropdown menu, selecting a firmware from the menu and tapping the Change button to load. To return to auto-
matic firmware selection, choose Automatic(UMTS) in the dropdown menu. Note: Switching between CDMA and UMTS firmware is not done automatically. You must select CDMA firmware manually to connect to CDMA networks. If you want to return to UMTS networks, you must manually select UMTS firmware. Activation on CDMA When CDMA Firmware is selected, the activation of the modem on the CDMA network starts automatically. During the process of loading CDMA firmware, an activation window pop up allowing a choice between Man-
ual Activation and Automated Activation. Label Manual Activation Automatic Activation Description Enter the requested items as direct by a representative from your carrier. Use your modem to start an automated activation session If you cancel the activation or if it fails, you can also start the activation manually by pressing the Activate but-
ton on the General tab. General Label Auto Launch Connect Automati-
cally Reconnect Auto-
matically Allow roaming Roaming Alert Description When selected OneClick Internet launches automatically when the user starts the Thor VM3 and logs in. When selected OneClick Internet automatically connects on start-up. When selected OneClick Internet reconnects automatically when the Thor VM3 returns from standby or hibernate. When selected OneClick Internet allows connections in foreign networks. Use care when enabling roaming to avoid roaming charges. When selected OneClick Internet displays an alert when roaming. 6 - 49 Label Description Gobi NDIS Auto Connect Application When selected OneClick Internet connects automatically after powering up the operating system and before the user logs in. Use the Application tab to specify any application to launch automatically once the Internet connection is estab-
lished. Use the Browse button to locate the desired application. Application Buttons SMS 6 - 50 The SMS Center window is split into menu bar, folder view, folder content and preview window. To manage your short messages you may:
Button Description Manage SMS folders Change SMS settings Create new SMS/MMS messages Reply to SMS Forward SMS Move SMS to a folder Delete SMS Send and receive SMS/MMS (if supported) Manage phone book contacts on SIM and in Email client. Folder By using this menu, you may change the folder structure of the SMS Center:
6 - 51 Button New Folder Rename Remove Description Creates a new folder, name has to be unique Renames an existing folder Removes an existing folder (including the messages) Note: Predefined folders can't be deleted or modified. Settings The settings window lets you change the deletion mode. You may choose whether to delete an SMS from the SMS Center, from the SIM or decide whether this should be asked at all. You may also activate an alarm signal when a new SMS arrives. New SMS The New Message window is used to enter the SMS text. You may also enter texts by copy & paste from other applications. The status bar at the lower right corner indicates the length of the SMS for your convenience: the first number tells you how many parts the SMS consists of (one part has max. 160 characters/unicode70), the second number counts down from 160/70 characters. The number in parenthesis () counts the total number of characters. The recipient for your SMS has to be entered in the To field. This can be either entered by typing digits or by clicking the To button to select a recipient from the address book. Recipient addresses may be taken from the SIM address book or from your Email client's contact folder. Just select an address and click OK. To send the mes-
sage click Send/Receive. Reply Highlight a message to which you want to reply, e.g. in the inbox folder, then click the Reply button. The New Message window opens and the recipient address is already filled in the To field. Continue as before when sending a new message. Forward Highlight a SMS, which you want to forward. Click the Forward button. The New Message window opens, how-
ever the message text is already copied. Continue as before when sending a new message. Move SMS.. Highlight the SMS to be moved and click the Move SMS button. A small window opens that lets you select the destination folder. Select the folder to which the message should be moved, then click Move. Delete Highlight the SMS which you want to delete. Click Delete to remove the message. Send/Receive Messages will be sent and/or received by clicking on this button. 6 - 52 Addresses Clicking this button opens the address book. You may add new contacts to your personal address book or you may change existing addresses, delete addresses or exchange them with your SIM card and your Email client applica-
tion, or export the data set. Buttons Description New Contact Modify Delete Copy Export Create new contact. Modify a contact. Delete contacts, mark one or more and press the button. Synchronization with MS Outlook. To export addresses you may select between two export formats:
CSV (comma separated text format, usually read by spread sheet applications)
VCard (business card format, used by MS Outlook and other applications) Web Browser Clicking this button opens the Web Browser and allows the user to surf the Internet once the connection is established. The default browser is used, which is Internet Explorer by default on the Thor VM3. Email Clicking this button opens the Email application after the connection is established. The Email application is the default Email client set in the Control Panel (Start > Control Panel > Internet Options > Programs tab). GPS Tap the GPS button to open the GPS window. Press Get GPS to start the GPS. The rotating GPS button indicates the GPS is active. 6 - 53 After Latitude and Longitude Data are displayed, the user can tap Track Me to open Google Maps, showing their cur-
rent location on a map. Lat - Latitude - The location north or south of the equator in degrees. Lon - Longitude: The angular distance from the Prime Meridian in degrees. After Latitude and Longitude Data are displayed, the user can tap Clipboard and the latitude and longitude are copied to the clipboard cache. The data can be pasted into an email, document or other electronic media. About OneClick Internet allows the user to configure the WWAN connection by entering basic setup information. The network connection (service carrier) can be chosen based on the firmware loaded, GPS tracking can be enabled and SMS messaging can be configured. Once configured, OneClick Internet allows the user to connect or disconnect from the mobile network. System Requirements OneClick Internet requires:
Gobi 000 3G Module (preinstalled by Honeywell)
Gobi 000 Driver package (loaded by Honeywell) OneClick Internet for Gobi 000is compatible with the following operating system on the Thor VM3:
Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Supported Languages OneClick Internet supports the following languages:
German, English, Spanish, French, Polish, Russian, Italian, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese. Note: This does not mean that the Thor VM3 has been localized for these languages. Installing or Upgrading OneClick Internet Note: You must use the Honeywell supplied version of OneClick Internet. Do not change versions unless instructed by your Honeywell representative. One Click Internet is pre-installed before the Thor VM3 is shipped. If you have an installed version of OneClick Internet and need to update to a newer version, you must uninstall the previous version first by selecting Start > Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs. Select OneClick Internet and tap Remove. Follow the on screen instructions. Note: OneClick Internet does not install the drivers for the Gobi 000 devices. Device drivers are preloaded. Installation When you double-click the Installer file for OneClick Internet, it extracts the files to install. 6 - 54 Next, select the application language. By default, the language of the OS is used (if available). Review and accept the license agreement. Click Accept, if you agree. Otherwise please click Reject to cancel installation. Next the installer asks for the installation directory. Use the Browse button to specify a location other than the default. 6 - 55 Installation process is indicated on screen. When completed. click the Finish button to exit the installer. Start OneClick Internet from the Windows Program Menu or double-tap the desktop icon. OneClick Internet Connection Manager Launch OneClick Internet from the desktop icon or Windows Start Menu. When OneClick Internet is active, a status icon appears in the system tray. 6 - 56 The main screen for OneClick Internet opens when the application is started. This screen displays basic information on the connection as well as access to more advanced features and details. From this screen you can connect to the Internet, send Emails, send short messages (SMS) and access the GPS. General Windows controls for minimize and exit are located at the upper right of the screen. Connection Management Refer to the table below for descriptions of the items in the connection management area. Icon Description Network signal strength Additionally the network name is displayed to the right of the icon. The more green bars, the stronger the signal. Connect / Cancel / Disconnect Tap this button to connect or disconnect. The color of this button also indicates the status of the connection:
The radio is disconnected. Tap the button to connect. The radio is currently connecting. The radio is connected. Tap the button to disconnect. SMS The SMS button is enabled if no Internet connection is active. When this button is active, tapping it ac-
cesses the integrated SMS application. Web Tap this button to launch the default browser. Email Tap this button to launch the default Email application. GPS Tap this button access the integrated GPS tool. 6 - 57 Information Buttons Icon Description Radio On/Off Tap this button to switch the radio state. The color of this button also indicates the state of the radio:
The radio is On. Tap the button to turn the radio Off. The radio is Off. Tap the button to turn the radio On. The radio is Connecting or the radio has been disabled. The button is inactive at this time. Statistics Show/Hide Tap the button to expand the screen to include connection statistics. See Statistics Button (page 6-
42) for details. Tap the button to hide the connection statistics. Settings Tap this button to access One Clink Internet settings. Select from several tabs to configure the connection settings. See Settings Button (page 6-43) for details. Update Tap this button to access OneClick Internet update tab. See Update Button (page 6-42). Help Click this button to view the online help. Ready. Tap the Connect button to establish a connection. Status Connecting. Tap the Cancel button to cancel the connection in process. Connected. Tap the Disconnect button to end the connection. Failure. Review the screen for messages such as No Network, etc. 6 - 58 7 Key Maps Integrated Keypad P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 There are seven integrated programmable keys located on the Thor VM3 below the display. Each programmable key can be modified by the Orange key for a total of 14 programmable keys. See Programmable Key (page 5-41) to remap these keys. The default values for these keys are:
To get this Programmable Key Press These Keys in this Order Default Key Value F1 F2 F3 Open/Close Soft Keyboard Enter
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
P1 (Programmable key 1) P2 (Programmable key 2) P3 (Programmable key 3) P4 (Programmable key 4) P5 (Programmable key 5) P6 (Programmable key 6) P7 (Programmable key 7) P8 (Programmable key 8) P9 (Programmable key 9) P10 (Programmable key 10) P10 (Programmable key 11) P10 (Programmable key 12) P10 (Programmable key 13) P10 (Programmable key 14) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 The following key press sequences are not programmable:
To get this function Press These Keys in this Order Increase speaker volume Decrease speaker volume Increase display brightness Decrease display brightness Blue Blue Blue Blue P1 P2 P5 P6 The Blue plus P3, P4 or P7 key press sequences cause no action. 7 - 1 External 21-Key Keyboard The table below shows the results of the keypress combinations. Each key has an unshifted mode, a Yellow shifted mode and a Green shifted mode.
To enter Yellow shifted mode, press the Yellow key. The keypad remains in Yellow shifted mode until any other key is pressed or the Yellow key is pressed again.
To enter Green shifted mode, press the Green key. The keypad remains in Green shifted mode until any other key is pressed or the Green key is pressed again.
Pressing the Yellow key then the Green key cancels Yellow mode and the keypad is in Green shifted mode.
Pressing the Green key then the Yellow key cancels Green mode and the keypad is in Yellow shifted mode.
Arrow keys are unaffected by Yellow or Green shifted mode.
Keypress combinations marked as N/A do nothing.
Pressing the backlight key (alone or after the Green or Yellow keys) cycles the keypad backlight through Low, Medium, High, Off then repeats. To get this Key Press These Keys in this Order 0 - 91 Yellow Green PF Yellow Del Yellow Tab Yellow Orange Orange Orange Orange 1 - 0 1 - 0 PF Del Tab P3 P4 P5 P6 0 - 9 F1 - F10 F11 - F20 P15 P16 Delete Backspace Tab Backtab 7 - 2 External 95-Key Keyboard Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Screen SysRq Scroll Lock Pause Break
!
1
~
`
Tab Caps Lock Shift Ctrl
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
) 0 Q A W S E D R F T Y G H U J I K O L C V B N M
<
, Z X Alt _
-
+
=
BackSpace
{
[
"
'
?
/
P
:
;
>
. Alt
}
]
|
\
Enter Shift Ctrl
/
8 5 2 Num Lock 7 Home 4 1 End 0 Ins Fn
-
+
*
9 PgUp 6 3 PgDn
. Del Enter L R These key functions apply to both the 95-Key USB Keyboard (page 3-18) and the 95-key PS/2 Keyboard (page 3-19). The key map table that follows lists the commands used for the Thor VM3. Note that since the Thor VM3 uses a Microsoft Win-
dows operating system, no DOS Terminal Emulation keypress sequences are provided. There are 10 hidden keys on the 95 key keyboard. Each of the hidden keys is accessed by pressing the <Fn> key (located in the top right hand corner) plus a key on the numeric keypad on the right. Additional function keys are supported as well. To get this Key / Function Press These Keys in this Order Insert Home Page Up Delete End Page Down Up Arrow Left Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN 0 (numeric keypad) 7 (numeric keypad) 9 (numeric keypad)
. (numeric keypad) 1 (numeric keypad) 3 (numeric keypad) 8 (numeric keypad) 4 (numeric keypad) 2 (numeric keypad) 6 (numeric keypad) 7 - 3 External 60-Key Keyboard ESC 2ND CAPS BREAK F1 F2 R/S F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 CAPS BKLT F10 CTRL SHIFT
!
|
Q A ALT SP
@
W
# E
\
S Z
: D X
$
;
R F C
^
%
T
" G '
Y H
&
U J V
~
B N
*
. _ I K M
(
O
?
L
) P INS BKSP 2nd PgUp ENTER Home PgDn END
/
=
[
<
7 4 1 0
+
}
>
9 6 3 8 5
-
{
]
2
. DEL The key map table that follows lists the commands used when using the Thor VM3 with the 60-key PS/2 Keyboard (page 3-20). The 60-key keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator or key. NumLock can be toggled On or Off using the 2nd SHIFT F10 keypress sequence. The default for NumLock is On. Changes made to the NumLock status persist across a Windows restart. When running RFTerm, please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences. 60 Key KeyMap 101-Key Equivalencies
The following keymap is used on an Thor VM3 that is NOT running RFTerm. When running RFTerm an optional IBM 3270 Keypad Overlay (page 7-9) or IBM 5250 Keypad Overlay (page 7-9) is available.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the key sequence.
When the Thor VM3 boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be toggled with a 2nd + F1 key sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On. The keymaps below assume Caps is Off.
The Thor VM3 keyboard has several control keys. The following control keys are not used:
The 2nd function of the F3 key is not used as Windows Power Management controls all power management modes on the Thor VM3. The 2nd functions of the F4 and F5 keys are not used as the display brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the front of the Thor VM3. The 2nd functions of the F6 and F7 keys are not used as the Thor VM3 has TFT LCD screen with no provision for contrast adjustments. The 2nd functions of the F8 and F9 keys are not used as the sound volume on the Thor VM3 is controlled with a Microsoft Windows Control Panel. The 2nd function of the F10 key is not used as the display backlight timer also controls the keyboard backlight. To get this Key / Function Power On/Off 2nd Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Space Enter Enter (numeric) CapsLock (Toggle) Back Space Tab Back Tab Ctrl-Break Pause Press These Keys in this Order Power 2nd Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Sp Enter 2nd 2nd BkSp Tab 2nd F2 Ctrl 2nd Enter F1 Tab 2nd F2 7 - 4 Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Insert Delete (numeric) Home End Page Up Page Down ScrollLock F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 2nd 2nd A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S Bksp DOT Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Shift Shift Shift F10 F1 F2 7 - 5 t u v w x y z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 - 6 T U V W X Y Z Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 DOT
<
[
]
>
=
{
}
/ (numeric)
/ (alpha)
- (numeric)
- (alpha)
+ (numeric)
+ (alpha)
* (numeric)
* (alpha)
: (colon)
; (semicolon)
?
`
_ (underscore)
, (comma)
' (apostrophe)
~ (tilde)
\
|
"
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
(
) 0 DOT 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ctrl 7 Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 I (letter i) Ctrl D F L N M J H B S A G Q W E R T Y U O P 7 8 9 I (letter i) 7 - 7 7 - 8 8 Specifications and Reference Material Technical Specifications Thor VM3 Processor Memory Memory Mass Storage Mass Storage Storage Expansion Operating System Operating System Radio Modules Scanner Options Display Technology Keyboard Touch Screen External Connectors Beeper Power Supply Uninterruptible Power Supply Backup Battery (RCT) Intel Atom Dual Core CPU operating at 1.46GHz 1 GB DDR3 RAM 2 or 4 GB DDR3 RAM 16, 32 or 64 GB mSATA (Window Embedded Standard 7) 32 or 64 GB mSATA (Window 7 Professional) 32 or 64 GB mSATA 4 GB or larger mSATA Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional No operating system Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard 7 (32-bit) Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (64-bit) No operating system 802.11 a/b/g/n radio / Bluetooth Optional GPS / WWAN No integrated scanner, Optional serial, USB or Bluetooth scanners Intel GMA 500 graphics processor, XGA compatible Active matrix TFT Resolution: 1024 x 468 pixels 400 NIT (indoor) or 900 NIT (outdoor) brightness 12.1 (measured horizontally) display Transmissive with LED backlight Automatic brightness control on outdoor display Vehicle motion screen blanking available Integrated 7-key keypad Optional 95-key USB keyboard Optional numeric-only keyboard Impact resistive, standard hardened or premium Signature capture capability Optional defroster Field replaceable front panel including standard or premium touch screen and optional defroster Optional external 802.11 / GPS / WWAN antenna connectors Additional connectors on Quick Mount Smart Dock, see below Minimum loudness greater than 95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit 10 to 60 VDC isolated Internal UPS battery, 30-minute life at -20C (-4F) Internal lithium battery maintains Real Time Clock 8 - 1 Quick Mount Smart Dock Power Connector COM1Connector COM2 Connector CANBUS/AUDIO Connector USB Connector Power Switch External Power Supply Input Power 6-pin connector:
Direct10-60V DC input power Optional external converters for AC (90-240 VAC) and extended range DC (60-150 VDC) 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM1 with switchable power on pin 9 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM2 with switchable power on pin 9 15-pin male, CANbus/Audio connector supports either audio/microphone via adapter cable or J1939 Female and J1939 Male connectors via CANbus cable 9-pin female, USB connector supports USB host port via adapter cable Sealed power switch AC Adapter, 120-240VAC to 12VDC DC Input Voltage: 10- 60 VDC, Input Current: 4.6 Amps Input Fuse: 8A Time Delay. Replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP
Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R
Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Power Connector 6-pin connector:
Direct10-60V DC input power Optional external converters for AC (90-240 VAC) and extended range DC (60-150 VDC) 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM1 with switchable power on pin 9 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM2 with switchable power on pin 9 15-pin male, CANbus/Audio connector supports either audio/microphone via adapter cable or J1939 Female and J1939 Male connectors via CANbus cable 9-pin female, USB connector supports USB host port via adapter cable 15-pin female, USB connector supports 2 USB host ports via adapter cable One USB Host connector behind waterproof cap One RJ45 Ethernet connector behind waterproof cap Sealed power switch AC Adapter, 120-240VAC to 12VDC DC Input Voltage: 10- 60 VDC, Input Current: 4.6 Amps Input Fuse: 8A Time Delay. Replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP
Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R
Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. COM1Connector COM2 Connector CANBUS/AUDIO Connector USB1 Connector USB 2 Connector USB Host Connector Ethernet Connector Power Switch External Power Supply Input Power 8 - 2 Dimensions Thor VM3 Width Height Depth Weight 12.6 (31.9 cm) 10.3 (26.1 cm) 2.4 (6.2 cm) 6.75 lb. (3.1 kg)??
Quick Mount Smart Dock Note: The RAM ball is not included in the following measurements. Length Width Height Weight 7.1 (18.0 cm) 6.1 (15.5 cm) 2.5 (6.4 cm), measurement includes strain relief cable clamps 3.2 lb. (1.5 kg) 8 - 3 Environmental Specifications Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock Operating Temperature Storage Temperature ESD Operating Humidity Water and Dust ESD Vibration Crash
-22 to 122 F (-30C to 50C) [non-condensing]
-22F to 140F (-30C to 60C) [non-condensing]
8 KV air, 4kV direct contact Up to 95% non-condensing ??
IEC 60529 compliant to IP66 15 kV MIL-STD-810F, composite wheeled vehicles. SAE-J 1455 Network Card Specifications
?? 802.11a/b/g/n Bus Interface Wireless Frequencies
(varies by regulatory domain) RF Data Rates RF Power Level Channels Connectivity Diversity Bluetooth Bus Interface Enhanced Data Rate Connection Bluetooth Version Operating Frequency QDID WWAN SDIO (Secure Digital I/O) 2.4 to 2.4895 GHz IEEE 802.11b / 802.11g DSSS OFDM 5.15 to 5.82 GHz IEEE 802.11a DSSS OFDM 802.11a (OFDM) 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps 802.11b (DSSS) 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps 802.11g (OFDM) 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps 802.11n (OFDM 20 MHz chs) 13, 26, 39, 52, 78, 104, 117, 130 Mbps 802.11n (OFDM 40 MHz chs) 27, 54, 81, 108, 162, 216, 243, 270 Mbps 50 mW max. FCC: 1-11, 36, 40 ,44, 48, 149, 153, 157, 161 ETSI: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 ,48 TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI Yes USB Up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air No less than 32.80 feet (10 meters) line of sight 2.0 + EDR 2.402 - 2.480 GHz B013455 8 - 4 Port and Connector Pinouts Power Supply Connector 4 3 2 5 6 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal V In+
V In+
V In-
V In-
GND Ignition Description 10-60V DC input +
10-60V DC input +
input -
input -
Chassis ground
+0V to 60V to start terminal PIN 1 PIN 5 COM1 and COM2 Connector Signal Pin DCD 1 RXD 2 TXD 3 DTR 4 GND 5 DSR 6 RTS 7 CTS 8 9
+5VDC Shell CGND PIN 9 PIN 6 Description Data Carrier Detect Input Receive Data Input Transmit Data Output Data Terminal Ready Output Signal/Power Ground Data Set Ready Input Request to Send Output Clear to Send Input Bar Code Scanner Power - 500mA max Chassis Ground 8 - 5 USB Connector PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 9 PIN 6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal GND USBC_D+
USBC_D-
USB_H1_PWR GND GND USB_H1_D+
USB_H1_D-
USBC_VBUS Description Common ground USB client data signal USB client data signal USB host 1; 5V output power Common ground Common ground USB host 1 data signal USB host 1 data signal USB client 5V detect from attached host USB Y Cable D9 Male Connector PIN 1 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 9 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND USBC_D+
USBC_D-
USB_H1_PWR GND GND USB_H1_D+
USB_H1_D-
USBC_VBUS Common ground USB client data signal USB client data signal USB host 5V output power Common ground Common ground USB host 1 data signal USB host 1 data signal USB client 5V detect from attached host USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H1_D-
USB_H1_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground USB Client Connector The USB client connection is not supported on the Thor VM3. 8 - 6 USB Connector2 PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used USB_H2_PWR USB_H2_D+
USB_H2_D-
GND GND USB_H3_PWR USB_H3_D+
USB_H3_D-
GND GND Description USB host 2 5V output power USB host 2 data signal USB host 2 data signal Common ground Common ground USB host 3 5V output power USB host 3 data signal USB host 3 data signal Common ground Common ground 8 - 7 USB Y Cable D15 Male Connector PIN 1 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 15 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used USB_H2_PWR USB_H2_D+
USB_H2_D-
GND GND USB_H3_PWR USB_H3_D+
USB_H3_D-
GND GND USB host 2 5V output power USB host 2 data signal USB host 2 data signal Common ground Common ground USB host 3 5V output power USB host 3 data signal USB host 3 data signal Common ground Common ground USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H2_D-
USB_H2_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H3_D-
USB_H3_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground 8 - 8 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 11 PIN 15 PIN 10 CANbus / Audio Connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Headset Adapter Cable Signal Name
-
CAN_L CAN_GND
-
GND Audio return Audio output Mic input Mic return Audio Return GND CAN_SHLD CAN_H
-
CAN_V+
Description CAN reserved CAN_L bus line dominant low CAN Ground CAN reserved Optional ground Headset return Headset output Microphone input Microphone return Optional ground CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN reserved Option CAN external Power Supply D15 Female Connector PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Audio return Audio output Mic input Mic return Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Headset return Headset output Microphone input Microphone return Quick Connect Headset Connector PIN 4 PIN 1 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 Mic input Mic return Audio output Audio return Microphone input Microphone return Headset output Headset return 8 - 9 CANbus Y Cable D15 Female Connector PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Not Used CAN_L CAN_GND Not Used GND Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used GND CAN_SHLD CAN_H Not Used CAN_V+
CAN_L bus line dominant low CAN ground CAN reserved Ground Optional ground CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN reserved CAN external power supply 9-Pin J1939 (Deutsch) Connectors Pin Signal Description Receptacle-
J1939 Female 3 4 Socket J1939 Mail 5 5 4 2 9 8 6 6 1 7 7 9 8 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CAN_GND CAN_V+
CAN_H CAN_L CAN_SHLD Not used Not used Not used Not used CAN Ground Option CAN external Power Supply CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN_L bus line dominant low 8 - 10 Hat Encoding 8 - 11 8 - 12 9 Customer Support Product Service and Repair Honeywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world. To obtain war-
ranty or non-warranty service, please visit www.honeywellaidc.com and select Support > Contact Service and Repair to see your regions instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA #). You should do this prior to return-
ing the product. Technical Assistance If you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device, please contact us by using one of the methods below:
Knowledge Base: www.hsmknowledgebase.com Our Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions. If the Knowledge Base cannot help, our Technical Support Portal (see below) provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question. Technical Support Portal: www.hsmsupportportal.com The Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem, but it also provides immediate solutions to your techni-
cal issues by searching our Knowledge Base. With the Portal, you can submit and track your questions online and send and receive attachments. Web form: www.hsmcontactsupport.com You can contact our technical support team directly by filling out our online support form. Enter your contact details and the description of the question/problem. Telephone: www.honeywellaidc.com/locations For our latest contact information, please check our website at the link above. Limited Warranty Honeywell International Inc. (HII) warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and to conform to HIIs published specifications applicable to the products purchased at the time of shipment. This warranty does not cover any HII product which is (i) improperly installed or used; (ii) damaged by accident or negligence, including failure to follow the proper maintenance, service, and cleaning schedule; or (iii) damaged as a result of (A) modification or alteration by the purchaser or other party, (B) excessive voltage or current supplied to or drawn from the interface connections, (C) static electricity or electro-
static discharge, (D) operation under conditions beyond the specified operating parameters, or (E) repair or service of the prod-
uct by anyone other than HII or its authorized representatives. This warranty shall extend from the time of shipment for the duration published by HII for the product at the time of purchase
(Warranty Period). Any defective product must be returned (at purchasers expense) during the Warranty Period to HII factory or authorized service center for inspection. No product will be accepted by HII without a Return Materials Authorization, which may be obtained by contacting HII. In the event that the product is returned to HII or its authorized service center within the Warranty Period and HII determines to its satisfaction that the product is defective due to defects in materials or workmanship, HII, at its sole option, will either repair or replace the product without charge, except for return shipping to HII. EXCEPT AS MAY BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER COVENANTS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. HIIS RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASERS EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT WITH NEW OR REFURBISHED PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL HII BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL ANY LIABILITY OF HII ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT SOLD HEREUNDER (WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM A CLAIM BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO HII FOR THE PRODUCT. THESE LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT EVEN WHEN HII MAY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INJURIES, LOSSES, OR DAMAGES. SOME STATES, PROVINCES, OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 9 - 1 All provisions of this Limited Warranty are separate and severable, which means that if any provision is held invalid and unen-
forceable, such determination shall not affect the validity of enforceability of the other provisions hereof. Use of any peripherals not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by this warranty. This includes but is not limited to: cables, power supplies, cradles, and docking stations. HII extends these warranties only to the first end-users of the products. These warranties are non-transferable. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 Vehicle Mount Assembly is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 internal UPS battery is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 AC power supply and cables is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 DC/DC power supply is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 cables (USB, Serial, Communication, Power) is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 headset is 1 year. 9 - 2 Back Cvr - 1 Honeywell Scanning & Mobility 9680 Old Bailes Road Fort Mill, SC 29707 www.honeywellaidc.com VM3-W7-UG Rev (a) 3/15
1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual-1 | Users Manual | 5.68 MiB |
Thor VM3 Vehicle-Mount Computer with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Users Guide Disclaimer Honeywell International Inc. (HII) reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made. The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII. HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII. 2014-2015 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Web Address: www.honeywellaidc.com Trademarks RFTerm is a trademark or registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.Micro-
soft Windows, ActiveSync, MSN, Outlook, Windows Mobile, the Windows logo, and Windows Media are registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Atom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Summit Data Communications, the Laird Technologies Logo, the Summit logo, and Connected. No Matter What are trade-
marks of Laird Technologies, Inc. Wi-Fi, WMM, Wi-Fi Mutlimedia, Wi-Fi Protected Access, WPA, WPA2 and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Symbol is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. Freefloat, Link*One, Key*One and Access*One are trademarks of Freefloat, Mlndalsvgen 30B, SE-412 63Gothenburg, Swe-
den. RAM and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108. Qualcomm is a registered trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated. Gobi is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated. Verizon is a registered trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC. T-MOBILE is a registered trademark of Deutsche Telekom AG. AT&T is a registered trademark of AT&T Intellectual Property. SD and SDHC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC in the United States, other countries or both. SanDisk and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation, registered in the United States and other countries. Transcend is a registered trademark of Transcend Information, Inc. ATP is a trademark of ATP Electronics, Inc. Acrobat Reader 2015 with express permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated. Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies and are the property of their respective owners. Patents For patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents. Table of Contents Chapter 1 - Thor VM3 Agency Information FCC Part 15 Statement........................................................................................................1-1 FCC 5GHz Statement ..........................................................................................................1-1 EMC Directive Requirements...............................................................................................1-1 Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices ................................................................................1-1 ANATEL (Brazil)...................................................................................................................1-2 Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement ..........................................................1-2 Li-Ion Battery........................................................................................................................1-2 RF Safety Notice..................................................................................................................1-3 Bluetooth..............................................................................................................................1-3 Honeywell Scanning & Mobility Product Environmental Information....................................1-3 CE Mark ...............................................................................................................................1-3 Chapter 2 - Getting Started Overview ..............................................................................................................................2-1 About this Guide ..................................................................................................................2-1 Out of the Box ......................................................................................................................2-2 Initial Setup for Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................2-2 Hardware Setup .............................................................................................................2-2 Software .........................................................................................................................2-2 Languages ...............................................................................................................2-2 First Boot..................................................................................................................2-2 Software Setup.........................................................................................................2-2 Quick Mount Smart Dock .....................................................................................................2-2 Components.........................................................................................................................2-3 Front View ......................................................................................................................2-3 Back View with Quick Mount Smart Dock ......................................................................2-3 Access Panels...............................................................................................................2-4 Backlights and Indicators .....................................................................................................2-5 Display Backlight............................................................................................................2-5 Power Management .................................................................................................2-5 Backlight Brightness.................................................................................................2-5 Screen Blanking .......................................................................................................2-5 Keypad Backlight ...........................................................................................................2-5 Speaker Volume.............................................................................................................2-5 Power Up .............................................................................................................................2-6 Rebooting the Thor VM3 ................................................................................................2-7 Restart......................................................................................................................2-7 Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus .............................................................................2-7 Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters ................................................................................2-7 Cleaning the Touch Screen .................................................................................................2-8 Startup Help .........................................................................................................................2-8 Chapter 3 - Hardware Overview 1 System Hardware ................................................................................................................ 3-1 802.11a/b/gWireless Client............................................................................................ 3-1 Central Processing Unit ................................................................................................. 3-1 Input/Output Components.............................................................................................. 3-1 System Memory............................................................................................................. 3-1 Video Subsystem........................................................................................................... 3-1 Audio Interface............................................................................................................... 3-1 Card Slots ...................................................................................................................... 3-1 CompactFlash (CF) Slot .......................................................................................... 3-1 Secure Digital (SD) Slot........................................................................................... 3-1 Bluetooth EZPair............................................................................................................ 3-1 WWAN ........................................................................................................................... 3-2 GPS ............................................................................................................................... 3-2 Power .................................................................................................................................. 3-2 Vehicle DC Power Supply.............................................................................................. 3-2 External AC Power Supply ............................................................................................ 3-2 Uninterruptible Power Supply ........................................................................................ 3-2 Safe Charging Temperature Range......................................................................... 3-2 Charging Timeout .................................................................................................... 3-3 Charging and Power Management .......................................................................... 3-3 Backup Battery .............................................................................................................. 3-3 Fuse............................................................................................................................... 3-4 Power Management Modes........................................................................................... 3-4 Power Controls .............................................................................................................. 3-4 Power Switch ........................................................................................................... 3-4 Power Button ........................................................................................................... 3-4 External Connectors ............................................................................................................ 3-4 Serial Connector (COM1 and COM2)............................................................................ 3-5 Screen Blanking...................................................................................................... 3-5 USB Connector(s).......................................................................................................... 3-5 CANbus / Audio Connector............................................................................................ 3-6 Power Supply Connector ............................................................................................... 3-6 Antenna Connections .................................................................................................... 3-6 External Antenna Connector.................................................................................... 3-7 Internal 802.11 Antenna .......................................................................................... 3-7 Vehicle Remote Antenna ......................................................................................... 3-7 Keyboard Options................................................................................................................ 3-8 Integrated Keypad ......................................................................................................... 3-8 Keypad LEDs........................................................................................................... 3-8 95-Key USB Keyboard................................................................................................... 3-8 Keyboard Backlight.................................................................................................. 3-8 USB Keyboard / Mouse ................................................................................................. 3-9 LED Functions ..................................................................................................................... 3-9 System LEDs ................................................................................................................. 3-9 SYS (System Status) LED ....................................................................................... 3-9 UPS Status LED .................................................................................................... 3-10 Charge Level.................................................................................................... 3-10 Charging State ................................................................................................. 3-10 2 SSD (Solid State Drive) LED ................................................................................. 3-10 Connection LEDs......................................................................................................... 3-11 WWAN LED ........................................................................................................... 3-11 Wi-Fi LED .............................................................................................................. 3-11 Bluetooth LED........................................................................................................ 3-11 Keyboard LEDs............................................................................................................ 3-12 Blue LED................................................................................................................ 3-12 Orange LED........................................................................................................... 3-12 Programmable LED ............................................................................................... 3-12 Display............................................................................................................................... 3-12 Touch Screen .............................................................................................................. 3-12 Touch Screen Defroster............................................................................................... 3-12 Screen Blanking........................................................................................................... 3-13 Display Backlight Control............................................................................................. 3-13 Chapter 4 - Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation Introduction........................................................................................................................ 4-15 Prepare for Vehicle Mounting ............................................................................................ 4-15 Quick Start ................................................................................................................... 4-15 Maintenance - Vehicle Mounted Devices .......................................................................... 4-15 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 4-16 Place Thor VM3 in the Dock.............................................................................................. 4-16 Dock I/O Pin Cover...................................................................................................... 4-17 Padlock ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 Laptop Security Cable ................................................................................................. 4-17 Install RAM Mount ............................................................................................................. 4-18 Components - RAM Mounting Kits .............................................................................. 4-18 Procedure - RAM Mount Assembly ............................................................................. 4-19 Torque Measurement ............................................................................................ 4-19 Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle ................................................................... 4-19 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-19 Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle ............................................................... 4-20 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-20 Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball ............................... 4-21 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-21 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock ....... 4-22 Step 3 Attach Thor VM3 Assembly to RAM Mount............................................. 4-22 Step 4 Place the Thor VM3 into the Dock........................................................... 4-22 Install U Bracket Mount ..................................................................................................... 4-23 Components - U Bracket Mounting Assembly ............................................................. 4-23 Procedure - U Bracket Assembly................................................................................. 4-23 Torque Measurement ............................................................................................ 4-23 Mounting Positions ................................................................................................ 4-24 Step 1 - Install U Bracket to Vehicle ...................................................................... 4-24 Mounting Dimensions ...................................................................................... 4-25 Step 2 - Remove RAM Ball.................................................................................... 4-25 Step 3 - Attach Adapter Bracket ............................................................................ 4-25 3 Connect Cables ................................................................................................................. 4-26 Strain Relief Cable Clamps.......................................................................................... 4-26 Connect Power ............................................................................................................ 4-27 Power Cable Cautions ................................................................................................. 4-27 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection)............................................ 4-28 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-28 Vehicle 10-60VDC Direct Power Connection.................................................. 4-28 Ignition Control Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 4-30 Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram ............................................................... 4-31 Manual Control Wiring Diagram................................................................. 4-32 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) ......... 4-33 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-34 Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection ........................................................... 4-34 Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 4-36 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) .......... 4-37 Power Cable Identification ..................................................................................... 4-38 Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection ........................................................... 4-38 Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 4-40 VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable ...................................................................................... 4-41 Connect to VX6 / VX7 Power Cable ................................................................ 4-41 Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable ..................................................................... 4-42 Connect to Thor VX8 / VX9 Power Cable ........................................................ 4-42 Screen Blanking..................................................................................................... 4-43 Screen Blanking Cable .................................................................................... 4-43 Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable...................................................... 4-43 User-Supplied Cable.................................................................................. 4-44 Screen Blanking Box........................................................................................ 4-44 Screen Blanking with Switch............................................................................ 4-45 External AC/DC Power Supply .............................................................................. 4-46 Connect External Power Supply ...................................................................... 4-46 Connect USB Host....................................................................................................... 4-47 Connect USB Client..................................................................................................... 4-47 Connect Serial Device ................................................................................................. 4-47 Connect a Tethered Scanner................................................................................. 4-48 Connect Headset Cable............................................................................................... 4-48 Adjust Headset / Microphone and Secure Cable................................................... 4-49 Under Clothing ................................................................................................. 4-49 Over Clothing ................................................................................................... 4-49 Connect CANbus Cable............................................................................................... 4-49 Install Remote Antenna ............................................................................................... 4-50 802.11 Remote Mount Antenna............................................................................. 4-50 Components and Mounting Diagram ............................................................... 4-50 Typical Installation ........................................................................................... 4-51 Mounting Instructions....................................................................................... 4-51 WAN Remote Mount Antenna ............................................................................... 4-52 GPS Remote Mount Antenna ................................................................................ 4-52 4 Apply Touch Screen Protective Film ................................................................................. 4-53 Installation.................................................................................................................... 4-53 Removal....................................................................................................................... 4-53 Disconnect UPS Battery .................................................................................................... 4-54 Install SD Card .................................................................................................................. 4-55 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-55 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................. 4-55 Install SLC Drive................................................................................................................ 4-56 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-56 Install SIM Card ................................................................................................................. 4-57 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-57 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................. 4-57 Replace Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 4-58 Equipment Required .................................................................................................... 4-58 Replacement Procedure .............................................................................................. 4-58 Chapter 5 - Software Microsoft Windows Setup and Configuration....................................................................... 5-1 Drive C Folder Structure ................................................................................................ 5-1 Software Loaded on Drive C.................................................................................... 5-1 Microsoft Windows............................................................................................. 5-1 Device Drivers.................................................................................................... 5-1 Radio Software .................................................................................................. 5-1 Touch Screen Software ..................................................................................... 5-2 RFTerm.............................................................................................................. 5-2 Summit Client Utility........................................................................................... 5-2 Laird Configuration Manager ............................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Link*One Wedge................................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Access*One TE (Optional).................................................................. 5-2 Freefloat Key*One ............................................................................................. 5-2 Selecting Keyboard Layout .......................................................................... 5-2 Launching Keyboard .................................................................................... 5-2 Launching Keyboard with Programmable Key............................................. 5-2 Creating Customized Layout........................................................................ 5-3 Drive D Folder Structure ................................................................................................ 5-3 Control Panel....................................................................................................................... 5-4 About ............................................................................................................................. 5-4 Software................................................................................................................... 5-4 Firmware Versions ............................................................................................. 5-4 Language ........................................................................................................... 5-4 Versions................................................................................................................... 5-5 Versions Tab and the Registry........................................................................... 5-5 Network IP ............................................................................................................... 5-5 MAC Address..................................................................................................... 5-5 AutoOn........................................................................................................................... 5-6 Standard .................................................................................................................. 5-6 Ignition Control......................................................................................................... 5-6 5 Auto-On ................................................................................................................... 5-6 Bluetooth........................................................................................................................ 5-7 Bluetooth Devices.................................................................................................... 5-9 Discover................................................................................................................... 5-9 Stop Button ........................................................................................................ 5-9 Bluetooth Device List ....................................................................................... 5-10 Clear Button ..................................................................................................... 5-10 Bluetooth Device Menu.................................................................................... 5-10 Right-Click Menu Options .......................................................................... 5-10 Bluetooth Device Properties ............................................................................ 5-11 Settings.................................................................................................................. 5-11 Turn Off Bluetooth............................................................................................ 5-11 Options............................................................................................................. 5-11 Reconnect.............................................................................................................. 5-13 Options............................................................................................................. 5-13 About ..................................................................................................................... 5-14 Using Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 5-15 Bluetooth Devices Display - Before Discovering Devices................................ 5-15 Initial Configuration .......................................................................................... 5-15 Subsequent Use .............................................................................................. 5-15 Bluetooth Indicators ......................................................................................... 5-16 Bluetooth Bar Code Reader Setup .................................................................. 5-16 Thor VM3 with Label .................................................................................. 5-17 Thor VM3 without Label ............................................................................. 5-17 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications ......................................................... 5-18 Bluetooth Printer Setup.............................................................................. 5-18 Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect ................................................................... 5-18 Disk Lock ..................................................................................................................... 5-19 Display ......................................................................................................................... 5-21 Options ........................................................................................................................ 5-23 5V on COM1 .......................................................................................................... 5-23 5V on COM2 .......................................................................................................... 5-23 Touch Screen Disable ........................................................................................... 5-23 Keyboard Backlight................................................................................................ 5-23 USB Powered in Standby or Sleep........................................................................ 5-23 Power Options ............................................................................................................. 5-24 Select a Power Scheme or Power Plan................................................................. 5-24 Power Schemes............................................................................................... 5-24 Select a Power Plan......................................................................................... 5-25 AC/DC.............................................................................................................. 5-26 AC/DC Behavior............................................................................................... 5-27 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-27 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-27 Result ................................................................................................... 5-27 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-27 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-27 Result ................................................................................................... 5-27 Ignition Control/Ignition On .............................................................................. 5-28 6 Ignition Control/Ignition On Behavior ............................................................... 5-29 Thor VM3 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On ............................ 5-29 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-29 Result ................................................................................................... 5-29 Thor VM3 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On ............................ 5-29 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-29 Result ................................................................................................... 5-29 Ignition Control/Ignition Off .............................................................................. 5-30 Ignition Control/Ignition Off Behavior ............................................................... 5-31 Thor VM3 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Off ................................................ 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Thor VM3 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to Off ............................ 5-31 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-31 Result ................................................................................................... 5-31 Auto-On............................................................................................................ 5-32 Auto-On Behavior ............................................................................................ 5-33 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-33 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-33 Result ................................................................................................... 5-33 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-33 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-33 Result ................................................................................................... 5-33 UPS.................................................................................................................. 5-34 UPS Behavior .................................................................................................. 5-34 Thor VM3 is Off.......................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Result ................................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Results ................................................................................................. 5-34 Thor VM3 is On.......................................................................................... 5-34 Conditions ............................................................................................ 5-34 Result ................................................................................................... 5-34 View UPS Battery Status ....................................................................................... 5-35 Power Meter..................................................................................................... 5-35 Power Notification Icon .................................................................................... 5-36 Configure Power Button Behavior.................................................................... 5-36 Advanced ................................................................................................... 5-36 Choose What the Power Button Does ....................................................... 5-37 Hibernate ............................................................................................................... 5-38 Enable Hibernation .......................................................................................... 5-38 Configure Hibernation ...................................................................................... 5-39 Programmable Key ...................................................................................................... 5-41 KeyMap.................................................................................................................. 5-42 Remap a Key to Single Key ............................................................................. 5-43 Remap a Key to a Unicode Value.................................................................... 5-43 7 Remap a Key to a Key Sequence.................................................................... 5-43 Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values............................................. 5-43 Remap a Key to a Special Function................................................................. 5-44 Remap a Key to Launch an Application........................................................... 5-44 Remap a Key to Run a Command ................................................................... 5-44 LaunchApp............................................................................................................. 5-45 RunCmd................................................................................................................. 5-46 Region and Language ................................................................................................. 5-47 Install a Language ................................................................................................. 5-47 Change Display Language .................................................................................... 5-48 Uninstall Language ................................................................................................ 5-48 Screen Control............................................................................................................. 5-49 Screen Blanking..................................................................................................... 5-51 Automatic Brightness Control ................................................................................ 5-51 Current Level ......................................................................................................... 5-51 Defroster Control ................................................................................................... 5-51 Screen Rotation ........................................................................................................... 5-52 Sounds......................................................................................................................... 5-52 System Rating (Windows Experience Index)............................................................... 5-53 Tablet PC Settings (Touch Screen Calibration)........................................................... 5-53 User Accounts ............................................................................................................. 5-53 Wi-Fi ............................................................................................................................ 5-53 Bar Code Readers............................................................................................................. 5-54 Scanner Wedge ........................................................................................................... 5-54 Touch Screen Calibration .................................................................................................. 5-54 BIOS .................................................................................................................................. 5-55 Accessing the BIOS Setup .......................................................................................... 5-55 Boot Order ................................................................................................................... 5-55 Exiting BIOS Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-55 Thor VM3 Recovery DVD .................................................................................................. 5-55 Thor VM3 with no Operating System................................................................................. 5-55 Upgrading the Thor VM3 ................................................................................................... 5-56 Automatic Firmware Update Utility .................................................................................... 5-56 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 5-56 Firmware Distribution Files .......................................................................................... 5-56 Update Process ........................................................................................................... 5-56 Configuration Cloning Utility (CCU) ................................................................................... 5-58 Launching Configuration Cloning Utility GUI ............................................................... 5-59 Windows Embedded Standard 7 and Windows 7 Professional:............................ 5-59 Using Configuration Cloning Utility GUI....................................................................... 5-59 Menu Options ........................................................................................................ 5-59 File ................................................................................................................... 5-59 About.......................................................................................................... 5-59 Open .......................................................................................................... 5-60 Close.......................................................................................................... 5-60 Save........................................................................................................... 5-60 Save As...................................................................................................... 5-60 Exit ............................................................................................................. 5-60 8 Edit................................................................................................................... 5-60 Registry............................................................................................................ 5-60 Import Settings........................................................................................... 5-60 Apply Settings ............................................................................................ 5-60 User ................................................................................................................. 5-60 Shortcuts................................................................................................................ 5-61 Modifying Settings ................................................................................................. 5-61 Using the CCU....................................................................................................... 5-62 Example 1: Import the current settings and save to a file ................................ 5-62 Example 2: Modify settings on the current device and save to a file ............... 5-63 Example 3: Reset a device to system defaults ................................................ 5-63 Example 4: Clone settings to another device................................................... 5-63 Configuration Cloning Utility Command Line Interface ................................................ 5-64 Chapter 6 - Wireless Network Connections Network Connections Control Panel.................................................................................... 6-1 Summit Wireless Network Configuration ............................................................................. 6-1 Important Notes ................................................................................................................... 6-1 Summit Client Utility ............................................................................................................ 6-1 Summit Tray Icon........................................................................................................... 6-1 Wireless Zero Config Utility ........................................................................................... 6-2 To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility .............................................. 6-2 To Switch Control to SCU........................................................................................ 6-2 Main ............................................................................................................................... 6-3 Admin Login............................................................................................................. 6-3 Profile............................................................................................................................. 6-5 Buttons..................................................................................................................... 6-5 Profile Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-6 Status............................................................................................................................. 6-8 Diags.............................................................................................................................. 6-9 Global .......................................................................................................................... 6-10 Custom Parameter Option ..................................................................................... 6-11 Global Parameters................................................................................................. 6-11 Logon Options ....................................................................................................... 6-13 Single Signon................................................................................................... 6-14 Pre-Logon Connection ..................................................................................... 6-14 Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials ......................................................................................... 6-15 To Use Stored Credentials .......................................................................................... 6-15 To Use Sign On Screen............................................................................................... 6-16 To Use Windows Username and Password ................................................................ 6-16 Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path.......................................................................... 6-17 User Certificates .......................................................................................................... 6-17 Root CA Certificates .................................................................................................... 6-17 Certs Path.............................................................................................................. 6-17 Windows Certificate Store ..................................................................................... 6-17 9 Configuring the Profile ....................................................................................................... 6-18 No Security .................................................................................................................. 6-19 WEP............................................................................................................................. 6-20 LEAP............................................................................................................................ 6-21 PEAP/MSCHAP........................................................................................................... 6-22 PEAP/GTC................................................................................................................... 6-24 WPA/LEAP .................................................................................................................. 6-26 EAP-FAST ................................................................................................................... 6-27 EAP-TLS...................................................................................................................... 6-29 WPA PSK .................................................................................................................... 6-31 Certificates......................................................................................................................... 6-32 Generate a Root CA Certificate ................................................................................... 6-32 Install a Root CA Certificate......................................................................................... 6-34 Generate a User Certificate ......................................................................................... 6-35 Exporting a User Certificate................................................................................... 6-36 Install a User Certificate............................................................................................... 6-37 Manually Initiate Certificate Installation ................................................................. 6-38 OneClick Internet............................................................................................................... 6-39 Preparing for Initial Use on the Thor VM3 ................................................................... 6-39 Install SIM Card ..................................................................................................... 6-39 Load Firmware....................................................................................................... 6-39 Activation ............................................................................................................... 6-39 Using OneClick Internet............................................................................................... 6-41 Connection Management....................................................................................... 6-41 Menu Buttons............................................................................................................... 6-42 Radio Button .......................................................................................................... 6-42 Statistics Button ..................................................................................................... 6-42 Update Button........................................................................................................ 6-42 Help Button ............................................................................................................ 6-42 Settings Button ...................................................................................................... 6-43 Profile............................................................................................................... 6-43 Buttons....................................................................................................... 6-44 Parameters ................................................................................................ 6-44 Network............................................................................................................ 6-45 Network with SIM Card .............................................................................. 6-45 CDMA Network .......................................................................................... 6-46 History.............................................................................................................. 6-46 PIN ................................................................................................................... 6-47 Activate/Deactivate PIN ............................................................................. 6-47 Change PIN ............................................................................................... 6-47 Info ................................................................................................................... 6-48 Firmware .......................................................................................................... 6-48 Activation on CDMA................................................................................... 6-49 General ............................................................................................................ 6-49 Application ....................................................................................................... 6-50 Application Buttons...................................................................................................... 6-50 SMS ....................................................................................................................... 6-50 Folder............................................................................................................... 6-51 10 Settings ............................................................................................................ 6-52 New SMS ......................................................................................................... 6-52 Reply................................................................................................................ 6-52 Forward............................................................................................................ 6-52 Move SMS.. .................................................................................................... 6-52 Delete............................................................................................................... 6-52 Send/Receive................................................................................................... 6-52 Addresses ........................................................................................................ 6-53 Web Browser ......................................................................................................... 6-53 Email...................................................................................................................... 6-53 GPS ....................................................................................................................... 6-53 About ........................................................................................................................... 6-54 System Requirements ........................................................................................... 6-54 Supported Languages...................................................................................... 6-54 Installing or Upgrading OneClick Internet ........................................................ 6-54 Installation........................................................................................................ 6-54 OneClick Internet Connection Manager....................................................................... 6-56 Connection Management....................................................................................... 6-57 Information Buttons................................................................................................ 6-58 Chapter 7 - Key Maps Integrated Keypad ............................................................................................................... 7-1 External 21-Key Keyboard................................................................................................... 7-2 External 95-Key Keyboard................................................................................................... 7-2 Chapter 8 - Specifications and Reference Material Technical Specifications ...................................................................................................... 8-1 Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................................... 8-1 Quick Mount Smart Dock............................................................................................... 8-2 Quick Mount Smart Dock 2............................................................................................ 8-2 Dimensions.......................................................................................................................... 8-3 Thor VM3 ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 Quick Mount Smart Dock............................................................................................... 8-3 Environmental Specifications .............................................................................................. 8-4 Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock ....................................................................... 8-4 Network Card Specifications ............................................................................................... 8-4
?? 802.11a/b/g/n............................................................................................................ 8-4 Bluetooth........................................................................................................................ 8-4 WWAN ........................................................................................................................... 8-4 Port and Connector Pinouts ................................................................................................ 8-5 Power Supply Connector ............................................................................................... 8-5 COM1 and COM2 Connector ........................................................................................ 8-5 USB Connector.............................................................................................................. 8-6 USB Y Cable............................................................................................................ 8-6 D9 Male Connector ............................................................................................ 8-6 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-6 11 USB Client Connector........................................................................................ 8-6 USB Connector2............................................................................................................ 8-7 USB Y Cable............................................................................................................ 8-8 D15 Male Connector .......................................................................................... 8-8 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-8 USB Host Connector.......................................................................................... 8-8 CANbus / Audio Connector............................................................................................ 8-9 Headset Adapter Cable ........................................................................................... 8-9 D15 Female Connector...................................................................................... 8-9 Quick Connect Headset Connector ................................................................... 8-9 CANbus Y Cable.................................................................................................... 8-10 D15 Female Connector.................................................................................... 8-10 9-Pin J1939 (Deutsch) Connectors.................................................................. 8-10 Hat Encoding ..................................................................................................................... 8-11 Chapter 9 - Customer Support Product Service and Repair................................................................................................. 9-1 Technical Assistance........................................................................................................... 9-1 Limited Warranty ................................................................................................................. 9-1 12 1 Thor VM3 Agency Information Thor VM3 mobile computers meet or exceed the requirements of all applicable standards organizations for safe operation. However as with any electrical equipment, the best way to ensure safe operation is to operate them according to the agency guidelines that follow. Read these guidelines before using your Thor VM3. This documentation is relevant for the following Thor models: VM3. FCC Part 15 Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules [and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada]. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diffe rent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution - Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment. FCC 5GHz Statement For the band 5600-5650 MHz, no operation is permitted.
!
High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. EMC Directive Requirements This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure require-
ment regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.1. Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003. 1 - 1
Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage adiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) L'ordinateur utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse suivante : http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux cartes sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.1 du document CNR-102, version 4. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Immediately following the above notice, the manufacturer shall provide a list of all antenna types approved for use with the trans-
mitter, indicating the maximum permissible antenna gain (in dBi). Description Type Gain Manufacturer External wifi antenna, dual band 2.40-2.50G/
4.90-5.90G. Dual Band Swivel Mount. Dipole RP-TNC Blade R380500314 2.4 ~ 2.5Ghz: 1.6dBi 4.9 ~ 5.9Ghz: 5dBi LARSEN External Two-Way Radio Antenna WTS 2450 2.4 to 2.485Ghz: 3dBi 4.9 to 5.9Ghz: 3dBi LAIRD Technologies ANATEL (Brazil) Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no causar interferncia a sistema operando em carter primrio. A Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connec-
tion is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches (12.7 cm) of the batterys pos-
itive (+) terminal. Use VM3055FUSEKIT (or equivalent) to install the fuse as shown below:
For 12VDC input, use the 10A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use the 6A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use the 4A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use the 3A in VM3055FUSEKIT or a slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Li-Ion Battery When disposing of the Thor VM3 UPS battery, the following precautions should be observed: The battery should be disposed of properly. The battery should not be disassembled or crushed. The battery should not be heated above 212F (100C) or inciner-
ated. Safety requirements restrict the temperature at which the Li-Ion UPS battery can be charged. Charging is disabled if the ambi-
ent temperature is outside of the 0C to 35C safe charging range. In order to maintain UPS charge the Thor VM3 should have power applied while the unit is within the safe charging range for at least an hour each day. 1 - 2 RF Safety Notice This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accordance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation distance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. Bluetooth Class II Honeywell Scanning & Mobility Product Environmental Information Refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/environmental for the RoHS / REACH / WEEE information. CE Mark The CE marking on the product indicates that this device is in conformity with the following directives:
1999/5/EC R&TTE
2004/108/EC
2011/65/EU RoHS (Recast) In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply. European contact:
Hand Held Products Europe BV Nijverheidsweg 9-13 5627 BT Eindhoven The Netherlands Honeywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive. WWAN is not available in Singapore. 1999/5/EC EN 300 328 V1.8.1: 2012 EN 301 893 V1.7.1: 2012 EN 62311: 2008 EN 301511 V9.0.2 : 2003 EN 301908-1 V5.2.1 : 2011 EN 300440-2 V1.4.1 : 2010 EN 301489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 EN 301489-3 V1.6.1: 2013 EN 301489-7 V1.3.1 : 2005 EN 301489-17 V2.2.1: 2012 EN 301489-24 V1.5.1 : 2010 EN 55022 :2010 EN 55024 :2010 2004/108/EC EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 1 - 3 1 - 4 1 - 5 1 - 6 2 Getting Started Overview The Thor VM3 Vehicle Mount Computer (VMC) is a rugged, vehicle mounted computer running a Microsoft Windows 7 Pro-
fessional (64-bit) operating system and capable of wireless data communications from a fork-lift truck or any properly configured vehicle. Wireless communications are supported over a 802.11 WLAN network and, optionally, over a WWAN network. The Bluetooth module supports Bluetooth printers and scanners.
!
CAUTION - Before shipping the Thor VM3, be sure to Disconnect UPS Battery (page 4-54) . The Thor VM3 is designed for use with a vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock. The dock installs in the vehicle and connects to vehicle power. The dock provides conditioned input power for the Thor VM3. Peripheral connections are on the dock. The Thor VM3 is designed to easily be removed from the dock with a latch on the lower rear of the Thor VM3 housing. Since the dock remains attached to the vehicle, the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another vehicle equipped with a dock. The Thor VM3 contains a UPS battery which, when fully charged, can power the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes. This can be when the Thor VM3 is not attached to a Quick Mount Smart Dock or when the Thor VM3 is attached to a dock but the vehicle power is interrupted, such as when the vehicle battery is being changed. The Thor VM3 can be used with or without an external keyboard. There are 7 programmable keys (P1-P7) on the front bezel and, when used with the Orange modifier key, provide 7 additional programmable keys (P8-P14). Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for information on the latest upgrades for your Thor VM3. P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 About this Guide This users guide has been developed for a Thor VM3 with a Microsoft Windows 7 Professional operating system. 2 - 1 Out of the Box The following items may be packaged separately:
Thor VM3
Quick Mount Smart Dock (includes 10-60VDC power cable)
RAM or U-Bracket vehicle mount kit If you ordered additional accessories for the Thor VM3, verify they are also included with the order. Keep the original packaging material in the event the Thor VM3 should need to be returned for service. For details, see Product Service and Repair (page 9-
1). Initial Setup for Thor VM3 This page lists a quick outline of the steps you might take when setting up a new Thor VM3. More instruction for each step is listed later in this guide. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) if you need additional help. Hardware Setup 1. Install RAM Mount (page 4-18) or Install U Bracket Mount (page 4-23) to the vehicle. 2. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 3. Connect Cables (page 4-26) for any peripherals. 4. Connect Power (page 4-27). 5. Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 6. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the dock to the on position. 7. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the Thor VM3. Software This section only applies if the Thor VM3 was ordered with an operating system. For a Thor VM3 ordered without an oper-
ating system, see Thor VM3 with no Operating System (page 5-55). Languages The language selection and installation process varies by operating system:
The Thor VM3 with a Windows 7 Professional operating system provides a choice between English or Simplified Chinese upon initial configuration. Once selected, the operating system language cannot be changed without reinstallation using a recovery DVD. Recovery DVDs may also be available for additional languages. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) to order a Thor VM3 Recovery DVD (page 5-14). The language installed is identified on the Software tab of the About (see page 5-3) control panel. First Boot The first boot (also known as the Out of Box Experience) provides initial configuration of the Thor VM3. When a Thor VM3 is ordered with a Windows 7 Professional operating system, the product key is printed on a decal on the rear of the Thor VM3. It may be necessary to remove the Thor VM3 from the dock to view the product key decal. Under nor-
mal circumstances, it is not necessary to re-enter the product key as it was entered during the manufacturing process. If the Thor VM3 was ordered without an operating system, a product key must be provided by the customer to activate Windows. When a new Thor VM3 starts up a EULA (End User License Agreement) may be displayed on the touch screen. It remains on the screen until the Accept or Decline button is tapped with a stylus. Tap the Accept button to accept the EULA terms and the Thor VM3 continues the startup process. The EULA is not presented to the user again. Tap the Decline button to decline the EULA and the Thor VM3 reboots. It will continue to reboot until the Accept but-
ton is tapped with the stylus. 2 - 2 Software Setup Hardware setup should be completed before starting software setup. Smart Dock The Thor VM3 assembly consists of two parts, the Thor VM3 computer and the Smart Dock. The Thor VM3 contains an internal UPS battery that, once fully charged, powers the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes when the unit is not mounted in the Smart Dock. Standard Smart Dock The Standard Smart Dock provides:
A mount for the Thor VM3 computer. The dock attaches to a vehicle via a RAM or U-bracket mount or to a RAM table stand for use in an office environment.
Conditioned power for the Thor VM3. The dock accepts 10-60V DC power input directly or 50-150VDC power input with a DC/DC converter.
Strain relief cable mounts.
Mobility of the Thor VM3, since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another.
COM1 and COM2 serial connections for a tethered scanner, printer, PC connection, etc.
USB host connection via an adapter cable. This port also supports Honeywell external keyboards.
CANbus connection via an adapter cable.
Headset connection via an adapter cable. When a headset is not attached, the microphone and speakers on the Thor VM3 are active. Enhanced Smart Dock The Enhanced Smart Dock provides:
A mount for the Thor VM3 computer. The dock attaches to a vehicle via a RAM or U-bracket mount or to a RAM table stand for use in an office environment.
Conditioned power for the Thor VM3. The dock accepts 10-60V DC power input directly or 50-150VDC power input with a DC/DC converter.
Strain relief cable mounts.
Mobility of the Thor VM3, since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM3 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another.
COM1 and COM2 serial connections for a tethered scanner, printer, PC connection, etc.
USB1 connector provides host connection vi a an adapter cable. This port also supports Honeywell external keyboards.
USB2 connector provides 2 USB host connections via an adapter cable.
CANbus connection via an adapter cable.
Headset connection via an adapter cable. When a headset is not attached, the microphone and speakers on the Thor VM3 are active.
A USB host port is located on the top of the Enhanced Smart Dock.
An RJ-45 Ethernet connector is located on the top of the Enhanced Smart Dock. Additional Connectors External antenna connectors may be present on the back of the Thor VM3. The connectors may include:
802.11 antenna connectors, used when the Thor VM3 is not equipped with internal antennas.
External GPS antenna connector, when th e Thor VM3 is equipped with GPS.
External WWAN antenna connectors, when t he Thor VM3 is equipped with WWAN. Optional WWAN radio (available in North America, Europe, New Zealand, and Australia only). Components Front View - Thor VM3 2 - 3 Microphone Power Button Ambient Light Sensor P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 Back View - Thor VM3 Speakers 2 - 4 Dock Connector Panel Provision for Laptop Security Cable Provision for Padlock Quick Release Handle Access Panels - Thor VM3 SIM and mSATA Card Access Pane with door removed WWAN Antenna Cable Access Panel SIM Card and mSATA Access Panel 2 - 5 Backlights and Indicators Display Backlight There are several configuration options for the Thor VM3 display backlight:
Power Management The display backlight is controlled by power management. When the user activity timer expires, the display backlight is turned off. Timeouts can be set for the available power management schemes. See Power Options (page 5-6) for configuration options. Backlight Brightness The intensity of the display backlight can be manually configured:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2. 3. Press the P5 key to increase backlight brightness or the P6 key to decrease backlight brightness. 4. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. Refer to the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel for the current display brightness level. Screen Blanking The Thor VM3 can be configured to blank (blackout) the display while the vehicle is in motion. Refer to the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel for information. Keypad Backlight By default, the integrated keypad backlight follows the display backlight. The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled. To change this behavior, see the Options (see page 5-23) control panel. The external USB keyboard backlight is manually controlled. Speaker Volume The speaker volume can be adjusted via the Thor VM3 keypad:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2. Press the P1 key to increase speaker volume or the P2 key to decrease speaker volume. 3. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. The current volume level can be viewed on the Sounds (page 5-11) control panel or via the system tray speaker icon. These items can also be used to adjust speaker volume 2 - 6 Power Up
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive and cannot. Please remove the USB drive and power up the Thor VM3 again. The Quick Mount Smart Dock has a power switch on the back. The On side of this rocker switch has a raised bump to allow the state of the switch to be determined when the switch may not be easily viewed, for example, after the dock is mounted in a vehicle. After external power has been connected and the Thor VM3 has been mounted in the dock, press the side of the power switch with the raised bump to pass power from the dock to the Thor VM3. Next locate the power button on the front of the Thor VM3. Press the power button to turn the Thor VM3 on. When the Windows desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power up sequence is complete. See Power Controls (see page 3-4) for more information. 2 - 7 Rebooting the Thor VM3
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive:
If the USB drive contains a bootable sect or, the Thor VM3 boots from the USB drive. If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 does not boot. Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM3 again. Restart Restart performs a controlled shutdown of the Thor VM3 and then restarts the device.
Use the Ctrl + Alt + Del keypress sequence to start the task manager. Tap the Shut Down button and select Restart from the pull-down list. Tap the OK button to restart the Thor VM3.
Select Start > Shut Down > Restart and tap OK to restart the Thor VM3 Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus Note: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touch screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or sharp/abrasive object to write on the touch screen. Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use. Using a stylus is similar to moving the mouse pointer then left-clicking icons on a desktop computer screen. Using the stylus to tap icons on the touch screen is the basic action that can:
Open applications
Choose menu commands
Select options in dialog boxes or drop-down boxes
Drag the slider in a scroll bar
Select text by dragging the stylus across the text
Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data
Place the cursor in a text box prior to retrieving data using a scanner/imager. A right click is generated by tapping the mouse icon , usually located in the upper right hand corner of the screen. After tapping, the mouse icon highlights the right button. The next touch screen tap is treated as a right click. The mouse icon returns to the left button highlighted so subsequent taps are treated as left clicks. Note:
If the mouse icon is not displayed, this feature can be enabled by tapping the PenMount icon the menu that pops up, tap the Right Button to enable the mouse icon. When this option is enabled, a checkmark is displayed in the menu. in the System Tray. From A stylus replacement kit is available. When a dialog box is too large for the display, tap and drag the dialog box up or down or from side to side to view the remainder of the dialog box. Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters Note: The instructions below are for Honeywell RFTerm. If a different terminal emulation software is installed on your Thor VM3 refer to the documentation for that software. Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know:
the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and the port number (Telnet Po rt) of the host system to properly set up your host session. 1. Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are connecting over wireless LAN
(802.11x), make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point. 2. From Start > Program, run RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop. 3. Select Session > Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require. This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e., 3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host. 2 - 8
4. Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system. 5. Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port. If not, just use the default telnet port. 6. Select OK. 7. Select Session > Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Tool Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen displayed. To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Bar Code, etc., refer to these sections in the RFTerm Reference Guide for complete descriptions of these and other features. Cleaning the Touch Screen Note: These instructions are for components made of glass. If there is a removable protective film sheet on the display, remove the film sheet before cleaning the screen. Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the bar code reader scanning aperture and the mobile device touch screen. If the glass becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex without vinegar or use isopropyl alcohol. Dampen the cloth with the cleaner and then wipe the surface. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint and particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Startup Help Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) if you need more help. Thor VM3 seems to lockup as soon as it is rebooted. There may be slight delays while the wireless client connects to the network, authoriza-
tion for voice-enabled applications complete, and Bluetooth relationships establish or re-
establish. When an application begins, the Thor VM3 is ready for use. 2 - 9 2 - 10 3 Hardware Overview System Hardware 802.11a/b/gWireless Client Central Processing Unit The CPU is a 1.6 GHz Intel Atom processor. The operating system is Microsoft Windows . The OS image is stored on an internal CompactFlash memory card and is loaded into DRAM for execution. Input/Output Components The Thor VM3 supports the following I/O components of the core logic:
Two 9-pin RS-232 serial ports, COM1 and COM2.
One slot for SD memory card.
CompactFlash (CF) memory card drive. Integrated keyboard.
Ports available via adapter cables : USB host port, CANbus, Audio. System Memory Main system memory is GB SDRAM. Video Subsystem The Thor VM3 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display. The video subsystem complies with the VESA VL bus standard. The resolution of this display is 800 x 480 pixels. This resolution complies with the WVGA graphics industry standard. The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Audio Interface Speakers are located on the bottom front of the Thor VM3. A headset adapter cable provides a connection for headset operation. When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable, the main speakers are disabled. A microphone is located at the upper right of the Thor VM3 display, near the Thor VM3 emblem. When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable, the internal microphone is disabled. Card Slots CompactFlash (CF) Slot The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable. The Thor VM3 must be powered down to insert or remove an ATA card. Since the operating system is stored on the CF ATA card, the Thor VM3 cannot operate without the ATA card. Secure Digital (SD) Slot The SD slot accepts an SD memory card. The SD card is hot swappable. Bluetooth EZPair The Thor VM3 contains Bluetooth version 2.0 with Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air. Bluetooth device connection (or pairing) can occur at distances up to 32.8 ft (10 meters) Line of Sight. The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active. The user cannot select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the Thor VM3. However, the Thor VM3 sup-
ports authentication requests from pairing devices. If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption, the Thor VM3 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode. Maximum encryption is 128 bit. Encryption is based on the length of the users passcode. 3 - 1
Bluetooth simultaneously supports one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner, either as a slave or as a mas-
ter Bluetooth device.
The LED on the Bluetooth scanner i lluminates during a scanning operation.
Multiple beeps may be heard during a bar code scan using a mobile Bluetooth scanner; beeps from the mobile Bluetooth scanner as the bar code data is accepted/rejected, and other beeps from the Thor VM3 during final bar code data manipulation. WWAN WWAN (Wireless Wide Area Networking) is available on the Thor VM3. A slot is provided for a SIM card. GPS GPS (Global Positioning System) is available on the Thor VM3. Power Vehicle DC Power Supply Vehicle power input for the Thor VM3 dock is 10V to 60V DC and is accepted without the need to perform any manual oper-
ation within the Thor VM3 dock, see 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28). The dock provides a conditioned power output for the Thor VM3. By using a specified DC/DC power supply, input voltage of 50-150V DC can be accepted, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37) or 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37). Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible, see Fuse (page 3-4). External AC Power Supply If DC power is not available for example, in an office environment an optional external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate DC level. AC to DC power input for the Thor VM3 is delivered to the Quick Mount Smart Dock via an optional external power supply and adapter cable. See External AC/DC Power Supply
(page 4-46). Uninterruptible Power Supply The Thor VM3 contains an internal UPS battery. The user can Replace UPS Battery (page 1-83) The UPS battery is automatically charged when the Thor VM3 is placed in a powered dock, provided the safe charging tem-
perature conditions below are met. When external power is removed, the UPS automatically powers the Thor VM3 with no user intervention. When running on UPS power, the power management timeouts may be different than when vehicle power is applied. The UPS allows the Thor VM3 to continue operation when not mounted in a dock or when the vehicle battery is being swapped. When fully charged the UPS battery is designed to power the Thor VM3 for a minimum of 30 minutes at tem-
peratures of -20C (-4F) or greater. For the extended temperature version of the Thor VM3, the UPS provides a minimum of 10 minutes of operation between -20C (-4F) and -30C (-22F). If operating on UPS power and the UPS battery becomes critically low, the Thor VM3 performs a controlled shutdown. If there is no external power available, there must be 10% or greater power in the UPS battery or the Thor VM3 does not power on. The UPS status LED and the Battery Control Panel can be used to monitor the state of the UPS battery. Safe Charging Temperature Range The internal temperature of the Thor VM3 is the trigger for UPS battery charging.
The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM 3 temperature is below 0C (32F). This corresponds to an ambient (room) temperature of approximately -10C (-14F).
The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM 3 temperature is above 45C (113F). This corresponds to an ambient (room) temperature of approximately 35C (95F). 3 - 2 If the UPS battery cannot be charged due to a temperature extreme, the UPS Status LED (page 3-10) is amber. Move the Thor VM3 to a different location to charge the UPS battery. When the Thor VM3 is operated in an environment where the UPS battery is not able to charge due to temperature extremes, the Thor VM3 should be removed to a location within the safe charging temperature range during off hours. A discharged UPS battery cannot protect against data loss in the event vehicle power is interrupted. Charging Timeout
A fully discharged UPS battery normally recharges in less than 4 hours when the Thor VM3 is in a powered dock and within the safe charging temperature range. If the UPS battery is not charged befor e an 8 hour (or 4 hours for some earlier software revisions) timeout period expires, the UPS Status LED (page 3-10) is amber.
The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes upon application of external power.
The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes when t he Thor VM3 enters the permissible temperature range for charging. Charging and Power Management Backup Battery The Thor VM3 has a permanent Lithium battery installed to maintain time, date and CMOS setup information for a minimum of 90 days. The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last years with normal use before it requires replace-
ment. Note: The backup battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel. 3 - 3
Fuse The Thor VM3 uses an 8A time delay (slow blow), fuse that is externally accessible and user replaceable. The fuse is located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The fuse is accessed by unscrewing the cap as indicated. Should it need replacement, replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input power before changing the fuse. Power Management Modes Power Controls Power Switch After all cables are connected, the Thor VM3 can be powered on. There is a power switch located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch is a rocker switch. The power switch has a raised bump to identify the switch position even when it is hidden from view. When the side of the switch with the raised bump is pressed, the power switch is On. If the dock is connected to external power, the dock delivers power to the Thor VM3. Generally, once the dock is powered On, there is no need to power it off. The dock power can remain On even when the Thor VM3 is not attached. Power Button External Connectors Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port (serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). The external I/O connectors for the Thor VM3 are located on the right side of the Quick Mount Smart Dock (when viewed from the back). The Power Supply Connector (page 3-6) is on the left side of the dock (when viewed from the back). Antenna connectors are located on the top rear of the Thor VM3. 3 - 4 Serial Connector (COM1 and COM2) COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO The COM1 and COM2 connectors are D-9 male connectors located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port
(serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). The serial connectors are industry-standard RS-232, PC/AT standard 9pin D male connector. See COM1 and COM2 Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout detail. See Connect Serial Device (page 4-47) for more information. If a COM port is not being used for a scanner, it can be used for Screen Blanking (page 4-43) when the vehicle is in motion. Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc Screen Blanking The screen blanking signal can be provided either by a Honeywell Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch or relay. See Screen Blanking (page 4-43) for information on connecting screen blanking accessories. USB Connector(s) The USB or USB1 connector is a D-9 female connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinout detail. The USB-2 connector is a D-15 female connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinout detail. Power the Thor VM3 off before attaching a cable to any port
(serial, USB, Audio/CAN, etc.). COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc 3 - 5 CANbus / Audio Connector COM1 COM2 USB CANBUS/AUDIO The CANbus/Audio connector is a D-15 male connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CAN-
bus cable. The Thor VM3 does not support connecting audio and CANbus simultaneously. See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pin-
out detail. A headset cable attaches to the CANbus / Audio connector and provides a quick connect connection for a headset. See Connect Headset Cable (page 4-48) for more information. The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 (Deutsch) and 9 pin M SAE J1939 (Deutsch) connector. See Connect CANbus Cable (page 4-49) for more information. The CANbus interface is a virtual COM4 port. This port can be accessed using standard Windows API calls. Smart Dock Enhanced Smart Doc Power Supply Connector Power is supplied to the Thor VM3 through the power connector. Additionally this assembly pro-
vides a connection point for the vehicles chassis ground to be connected internally to the conduc-
tive chassis of the computer. The Thor VM3 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 10 to 60 Volts DC. See Power Supply Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout detail. See Connect Power (page 4-
27) for more information on connecting power to the Thor VM3. Antenna Connections 1 2 3 4 5 1. WI-FI (MAIN) 802.11 Main External Antenna Connector The Thor VM3 is equipped with an 802.11 radio and can be ordered with internal an-
tennas, external antennas or external remote mount antennas. When the Thor VM3 is ordered with internal antennas, the external antenna connectors are not used. GPS and WWAN are optional on the Thor VM3 and require external remote mount antennas. 2. WAN (MAIN) (Blue label) Main WWAN Antenna Connector 3. GPS (Green label) GPS Antenna Connector 4. WAN (AUX) (Blue label) Auxiliary WWAN Antenna Connector 5. WI-FI (AUX) 802.11 Auxiliary External Antenna Connector 3 - 6 External Antenna Connector When the Thor VM3 is ordered with the internal antenna option, the 802.11 antenna connectors on the back are not connected to the 802.11 radio. Instead the internal antenna connector is connected to the 802.11 radio. Remove the rubber cap, if present, from the antenna connector before connecting an external antenna. Internal 802.11 Antenna If the internal 802.11 antenna option is ordered, antennas are mounted inside the Thor VM3. The internal antennas are not user accessible. Vehicle Remote Antenna The external antennas can be remotely mounted on the vehicle. See Install Remote Antenna (page 4-50) for instruc-
tions. External antenna kits are available for the 802.11 Wi-Fi radio, GPS and WWAN. 3 - 7 Keyboard Options Integrated Keypad P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 The integrated keypad contains seven programmable keys, a blue modifier key and an orange modifier key. The P1 though P7 keys are user programmable.
When used with no modifier key, P1 through P7 can be configured for a user programmable function.
When used with the Orange modifier key, P1 through P7 provide secondary programmable keys, P8 through P14, and can be configured for a user programmable function.
The programmable keys can be remapped to provide a sing le keypress, a string of keypresses or to execute an application or command. Key remapping is configured via the Programmable Key (page 5-41) option in the Control Panel.
Programmable keys persist ac ross a warmboot or power cycle.
When used with the Blue modifier key, P1 and P2 keys are used to adjust speaker volume and P5 and P6 keys are used to adjust display brightness. The Thor VM3 integrated keypad is backlit.
By default, the integrated keypad backlight follows the displa y backlight. When the display backlight is on, the integrated keypad backlight is on. If the display backlight brightness is increased (or decreased) the integrated keypad backlight brightness is increased (or decreased).The integrated keypad backlight and the display share the same timer, which is configured in the Power Options (page 5-6) control panel.
The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled via the Options (page 5-23) control panel. Keypad LEDs See Keyboard LEDs (page 3-12) for details. 95-Key USB Keyboard Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Screen SysRq Scroll Lock Pause Break
!
1
~
`
Tab Caps Lock Shift Ctrl
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
) 0 Q A W S E D R F T Y G H U J I K O L C V B N M
<
, Z X Alt _
-
+
=
BackSpace
{
[
"
'
?
/
P
:
;
>
. Alt
}
]
|
\
Enter Shift Ctrl
/
8 5 2 Num Lock 7 Home 4 1 End 0 Ins Fn
-
+
*
9 PgUp 6 3 PgDn
. Del Enter L R The Thor VM3 uses an optional rugged QWERTY 95 key keyboard, designed for ease of use with the Windows CE operat-
ing system. The USB keyboard connects directly to the D9 USB connector on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock.
The 95 key keyboard supports all 104 keyboard functions (101 standard keyboard plus Windows keys) and includes an integrated pointing device and left and right mouse buttons. However, because the keyboard only has 95 keys, all functions are not visible (or printed on the keyboard). Therefore the keyboard supports what is called hidden keys - keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard.
The 95 key keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight is manually controlled. Keyboard Backlight The keyboard backlight key in the top right hand corner has a light bulb icon. 3 - 8
The keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight is manually controlled using the backlight key in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard. Pressing the backlight key cycles the keyboard backlight through the levels of backlight intensity: Off, Low intensity, Medium intensity, Maximum intensity, Off, etc. When the Thor VM3 is powered on, the key-
board backlight defaults to Off. Since the keyboard is a USB device, by default the external keyboard backlight is turned off when the Thor VM3 enters Standby/Sleep. This behavior can be changed by enabling USB power in Standby/Sleep on the Options (page 5-23) control panel. USB Keyboard / Mouse A standard USB keyboard or mouse can be attached to the Thor VM3 using the appropriate adapter cable. The Y cable attaches to the Thor VM3 and provides a USB connector. Please refer to documentation provided with the USB keyboard or mouse for more information on their operation. LED Functions System LEDs Programmable LED Connection LEDs Blue LED Orange LED System LEDs SYS (System Status) LED UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) LED SSD (Solid State Drive) LED SYS UPS SS D SYS (System Status) LED LED Behavior System State Solid Green
On
On but Display Off Green blinking very slowly External power present
(1/2 sec. on, 4 1/2 sec. off) Off External power present
Off 3 - 9
LED Behavior System State Off External power not present Green blinking slowly External power present
(1/2 sec. on, 1 1/2 sec. off) Green blinking slowly External power not present
(1/2 sec. on, 1 1/2 sec. off)
Off CPU temperature less than -20C, Heater warming CPU for 30 sec. CPU temperature less than -20C, Need to move unit to warmer environment UPS Status LED The color of the UPS LED identifies the charge level, while the behavior of the LED identifies the charging state. Charge Level LED Color Status Green Amber Fully charged (>90%)
Less than fully charged, but mo re than 2 minutes runtime remaining
Out of Safe Charging Temperature Range (page 3-2) Charging only occurs between approximately -10C and 35C ambient temperature
No UPS present
Charging Timeout (page 3-3) Not fully charged after 4 or 8 hours depending on software revision. Red Low battery, less than 2 minutes runtime until shutdown Charging State LED Behavior Slow Blink
(1 sec. on, 3 sec. off) Fast Blink
(1/2 sec. on, 1/2 sec. off) On Off Status Charging UPS supplying power and discharging Neither charging or discharging Unit is off or is in Suspend SSD (Solid State Drive) LED LED Behavior Status Flashing Green SSD read or write activity Off No SSD read or write activity 3 - 10 Connection LEDs WWAN LED Wi-Fi LED Wi Fi Bluetooth LED WWAN LED LED Behavior Solid Green Off Wi-Fi LED LED Behavior Solid Green Off Status Indicates a WWAN connection to a network Indicates no WWAN connection Status Indicates a connection with an IP address to an Access Point Indicates no connection to an Access Point Bluetooth LED LED Behavior Status Blue Blinking Slowly Blue Blinking Medium Blue Blinking Fast Off Bluetooth is paired but not connected to a device Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Bluetooth is discovering Bluetooth devices Bluetooth hardware has been turned off The Bluetooth LED blinks once every 6 seconds when the Bluetooth client is paired but not connected. It blinks once for a very short time every 2 seconds when paired and connected. It blinks every second when in discovery. The LED is off when the Bluetooth client is off. 3 - 11 Keyboard LEDs The keyboard LEDs are located near the specified key. Blue LED Solid Blue Indicates the Blue modifier key is active
Pressing the Blue key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED
Pressing the Orange key exits the Blue mode and turns off the Blue LED If no key other key is press ed within five seconds, the Blue key times out and turns off the LED
When Blue mode is active, keys P1 through P4 provide volume and brightness adjustment functions Off Blue mode is not invoked Orange LED LED Behavior Solid Orange Off Status Indicates the Orange modifier key is active. Orange mode is invoked for the next keypress only
Pressing the Orange key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED
Pressing the Blue key exits the Orange mode and turns off the Orange LED Orange mode is not invoked. Programmable LED The Programmable LED is available for user applications. The LED defaults to Off unless activated by user applica-
tion. Display The display is a thin-film transistor display capable of supporting WSVGA graphics modes. Display size is 1024x768 pixels. The display covering is designed to resist stains. The touch screen allows signature capture and touch input. The display sup-
ports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Touch Screen The touch screen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a stylus, and translate them into computer commands. In effect, it simulates a computer mouse. Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used. A right mouse click is simulated by touching and holding the screen for the appropriate time interval. When a dialog box is too large for the display, tap and drag the dialog box up or down or from side to side to view the remainder of the dialog box. Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use an actual pen, pencil, sharp or abrasive object to write on the touch screen. An extra or replacement stylus may be ordered. A replaceable touch screen protective film is available when the Thor VM3 is used in an abrasive environment. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for availability. Note:
If the touch screen is disabled or looses calibration on a Thor VM3, you must use a USB mouse or keyboard attached to the Thor VM3 to access the control panel to re-enable or recalibrate the touch screen unless a programmable key has been assigned to that function. Touch Screen Defroster Extended temperature versions of the Thor VM3 contain a touch screen defroster. The touch screen defroster can be dis-
abled when not needed via the Screen Control (page 5-9) panel. The defroster trip point is configurable. The defroster is always disabled when the device is operating from UPS battery power. 3 - 12
Screen Blanking Screen blanking (blackout) can be enabled when the vehicle is in motion. See Screen Blanking (page 4-43) for hardware setup and Screen Control (page 5-9) for software setup to enable screen blanking. Once screen blanking is enabled, the display is blanked out any time when the cable sends the signal the vehicle is in motion. If the cable is removed, screen blanking is disabled and the display remains on. Display Backlight Control The display brightness on a Thor VM3 equipped with an outdoor display can be configured to automatically adjust depend-
ing on the ambient light level via Screen Control (page 5-9). Note: When automatic brightness control is enabled, the manual display brightness controls described below have no effect. The display brightness can be adjusted manually, via the keypad:
1. Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode. 2. 3. Press P5 to increase brightness or P6 to decrease brightness. 4. Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode. 3 - 13 3 - 14 4 Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation Introduction The Thor VM3 is designed to be mounted to a Quick Mount Smart Dock in a vehicle with either a RAM mount or U Bracket sys-
tem. A power cable is provided with the Thor VM3 dock. Optional communication cables are available. Vehicle mounting brackets are specifically designed for vehicle mount applications. The vehicle mounted assembly restrains the Thor VM3 and isolates it from shock and vibration. A RAM metal table stand is available to secure the Thor VM3 and dock when in an office environment, for example. The vehicle mount holds the Quick Mount Smart Dock and the Thor VM3 attaches to the dock. The dock remains attached to the vehicle, however, the Thor VM3 has a quick release located on the lower rear side that allows the Thor VM3 to easily be removed from the dock. The Thor VM3 can be operated for a minimum of 30 minutes from an internal UPS battery when not attached to a dock. The Thor VM3 can be transferred from one dock equipped vehicle to another for easy portability. The dock provides accessory attachment and conditioned power for the Thor VM3. Overhead, dash and roof support pillar mounting is via a RAM Mount or U-bracket accessory which includes all the hardware required for vehicle mounting. Never put the Thor VM3 into the vehicle mounted assembly until the assembly is securely fastened to the vehicle. Prepare for Vehicle Mounting The Thor VM3 should be secured to an area in the vehicle where it:
Does not obstruct the driver's vision or safe vehicle operation.
Will be protected from rain or inclement weather.
Will be protected from extremely high co ncentrations of dust or wind-blown debris.
Can be easily accessed by a user seated in the driver's seat while the vehi cle is not in operation. Quick Start The following list outlines, in a general way, the process to follow when mounting the Thor VM3 in a vehicle. Refer to the fol-
lowing sections in this document for more details. 1. Install RAM Mount (page 4-18) or Install U Bracket Mount (page 4-23) to the vehicle. 2. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 3. Adjust the Thor VM3 to the best viewing angle. 4. Install Remote Antenna (page 4-50) if necessary. 5. Connect Cables (page 4-26) for any peripherals. 6. Connect vehicle power:
12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28) 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37) 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33). Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable (page 4-42) VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable (page 4-41) 7. Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). The Thor VM3 is ready for use. Maintenance - Vehicle Mounted Devices Check the vehicle mounting hardware frequently and re-tighten if necessary. If the vehicle mounting hardware and connections become broken, loose or cracked, the assembly must be taken out of service and replaced. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for help. 4 - 15
Cleaning Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the Thor VM3 surfaces, cables, connectors and mounting hardware. Use a clean soft cloth to wipe any dirt, moisture or grease from the Thor VM3, connectors, cables or the vehicle mounting hard-
ware. Do not use any liquid to clean the Thor VM3, or connectors. Spray or dampen the cleaning cloth with the cleaning liquid. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock Back of Thor VM3 Front of Smart Dock Upper Lip on Dock Notch on Thor VM3 Lower Lip on Dock Release Lever 1. Locate the notch on the upper rear of the Thor VM3. 2. Slide this notch over the top lip of the dock. Slide the Thor VM3 from side to side on the dock to make sure it fully engages on the lip of the dock. If the Thor VM3 cannot be slid side to side, the lip is engaged. 3. Pull the quick release lever on the Thor VM3 down and push the Thor VM3 against the dock. 4. Release the quick release lever. The quick release lever catches the lower lip on the dock and secures the Thor VM3 to the dock. 5. If necessary, adjust the viewing angle of the Thor VM3. When the Thor VM3 is placed in the dock, the following may happen:
When the Thor VM3 is removed from the dock, the following may happen:
4 - 16 Dock I/O Pin Cover. The dock contains a tethered I/O Pin Cover to protect the I/O pins on the dock when a Thor VM3 is not mounted in the dock.
When the Thor VM3 is not installed in the dock, use the I/O Pin Cover to protect the pins on the dock as shown.
When a Thor VM3 is installed in the dock, the I/O Pin Cover can be placed out of the way behind the dock. Padlock It may be desirable to secure the Thor VM3 in the dock so it cannot be removed from the dock. The quick release handle on the Thor VM3 is notched to allow a user supplied standard padlock to be placed through a hole in the bracket on the back of the Thor VM3 in the location shown below. Once the padlock is installed, the release handle cannot be moved so the Thor VM3 cannot be removed from the dock. The padlock shackle must be smaller than 3/16 (4.76mm). A cable tie wrap can be used instead of a padlock if desired. Laptop Security Cable The Thor VM3 can be secured with a standard laptop security cable using the slot on the back of the Thor VM3. 4 - 17 Install RAM Mount CAUTION - This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor-
dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis-
tance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. This device is not to be co-located with other transmitters. Before installation begins, verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary, as shown in the following figures. Components - RAM Mounting Kits In addition to the kits below, individual RAM mounting components are also available. Each mounting kit contains:
RAM Ball (Size D) for back of Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock with hardware (screws and washers) to attach RAM ball to dock RAM Arm (Size D), length varies by kit selected One of three mounting options:
RAM Ball mount (Size D, may include 3 cone washers), or
RAM Clamp mount (Size D), or
RAM Plate mount with RAM Ball (Size D) with Hardware (cone washers and nuts) to attach Ball to Plate 4 - 18 Procedure - RAM Mount Assembly Equipment Needed: Sockets, screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds (5.64.56 N/m). Note: Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell. Tools needed to attach the RAM Clamp Mount to the vehicle are not supplied by Honeywell. Torque Measurement You will need a torquing tool capable of torquing to 20 inch pounds (1.10 N/m). Torque all screws and bolts according to the following table:
For these nuts 10-32 lock nuts Torque to 17 - 20 in/lb (0-95 - 1.10 N/m) Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle Note:
If you are using the RAM clamp mount, please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle (page 4-20). If you are using the RAM plate mount, please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball
(page 4-21). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball base. Be sure to position the RAM bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the RAM ball base to the vehicle mounting surface using three or four 1/4 bolts (not included) or equivalent fasteners. If the mounting kit includes cone washers, use those as illustrated below. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available. Mounting Dimensions Note: Drill and tap holes for three 1/4 bolts. Drawing not to scale. 60 60 3.69" / 93.73 mm 120 120 2.75" / 69.85 mm 4 - 19 Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle Note:
If you are using the RAM ball mount, please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle (page 4-19). If you are using the RAM plate mount, please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball (page 4-
21). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM clamp mount. The clamp mount can be used on a beam (such as on a fork lift truck) up to 2.5 (63.5 mm) wide and approximately 2 (50.8 mm) thick. The clamp may be attached to a thicker beam by substituting longer bolts (not included). Be sure to position the RAM clamp mount to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. Bolts Upper clamp piece Lower clamp piece Nuts 2. Position the upper clamp piece with ball on the beam. Place the bolts through the holes in the upper clamp piece. 3. Position the lower clamp piece below the beam. Align the bolts with the holes in the lower clamp piece. 4. Place the nylon locking nuts on the bolts and tighten the bolts. Mounting Dimensions Note: Drawing not to scale. 2.56 /
65.02mm 1.84 (46.74mm) 4 - 20 Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball Note:
If you are using the RAM ball mount, please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle (page 4-19) If you are using the RAM clamp mount, please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle (page 4-20). 1. Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball plate. Be sure to position the RAM plate to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the RAM ball plate to the vehicle mounting surface using four 1/4 bolts (not included) or equivalent fasten-
ers. 3. If not already attached, attach the RAM ball to the RAM ball plate using three M6 nuts and washers. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available. Mounting Dimensions There are 4 mounting holes in the plate. Use four 1/4 bolts to secure the plate to the vehicle. Note: Drawing not to scale. 176 mm 6.99 200 mm 7.87 76mm 2.99 100mm 3.94 4 - 21 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock 1. Turn the Thor VM3 off before attaching the RAM mount ball. 2. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. Step 3 Attach Thor VM3 Assembly to RAM Mount 1. Slip the Size D RAM arm over the ball on the vehicle RAM mount (RAM Ball mount shown). 2. Insert the ball on the dock into the RAM arm and tighten the knob on the RAM arm using the supplied RAM wrench. Step 4 Place the Thor VM3 into the Dock If the Thor VM3 is not already mounted to the dock, Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 4 - 22 Install U Bracket Mount Before installation begins, verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary, as shown CAUTION - This device is intended to transmit RF energy. For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor-
dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules, this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis-
tance of at least 20 cm (7.8 in.) is maintained between the antenna and the general population. This device is not to be co-located with other transmitters. in the following figures. Components - U Bracket Mounting Assembly The U bracket kit is available in two configurations:
With a U Bracket included for new vehicle installations
Without a U Bracket for installing the Thor VM3 in place of a previous Honeywell vehicle mounted computer, such as a VX6 or VX7. U Bracket (only included in kits for new installations) Adapter Bracket (includes screws, flat washers and lock washers to attach Adapter Bracket to Thor VM3 and to attach Adapter Bracket to existing U Bracket (for example, to a vehicle where a VX1, VX2, VX4, VX5, VX6 or VX7 was previously installed) Procedure - U Bracket Assembly Equipment Needed: Sockets and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds (5.64.56 N/m). Note: Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell. Torque Measurement You will need a torquing tool capable of torquing to 35-50 inch pounds (1.10 N/m). Torque all screws and bolts accord-
ing to the following table:
For these bolts Torque to 1/4-20x5/8 Bolts M5x16mm Bolts 1/4 Bolts (user supplied) 50 in/lb (5.6 N/m) 35 in/lb (4.0 N/m) 50.05 in/lb (5.64.56 N/m) 4 - 23 Mounting Positions The adapter bracket can be mounted in a high or low position, depending on viewing position, as shown below. Additionally, the slotted U bracket allows the Thor VM3 to be mounted vertically or tilted forward or backward for best viewing angle. Step 1 - Install U Bracket to Vehicle 1. Position the bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM3. 2. Attach the bottom mounting bracket to the vehicle mounting surface using a minimum of four 1/4 bolts (or equiva-
lent) fasteners. Note: 1/4 bolts and washers not included. It is recommended to use lock washers and flat washers on the fasteners. IMPORTANT: Mount to the most rigid surface available.
[
After the bottom bracket has been attached to a rigid surface, you are ready to assemble the Thor VM3 bracket config-
uration. 4 - 24 Mounting Dimensions Note: Drawing not to scale. 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 1. 14.40 in / 359.2 mm 2. 12.10 in / 307.3 mm 3. 6.05 in / 153.6 mm 4. 1.02 in / 25.9 mm 5. 3.38 in / 85.85 mm 9 6. Vehicle Mount Footprint 8 7. 0.406 in / 10.312 mm 8. 0.88 in / 22.3 mm 9. 1.25 in / 31.75 mm Step 2 - Remove RAM Ball If the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock has a RAM ball attached, the RAM ball must be removed from the dock to use the U Bracket mount. Remove the RAM ball. The hardware used to attach the RAM ball to the dock is not reused for the U bracket mount. Step 3 - Attach Adapter Bracket Note: For the steps below, always place the lock washer on the bolt before the flat washer. 1. Attach the Adapter Bracket to the Thor VM3 dock using four each M5x16mm bolt, M5 lock washer and M5 flat washer. Torque to 35 in/lbs (4.0 N/m). 2. Attach the Thor VM3/Adapter Bracket assembly to the U Bracket using 4 each 1/4-20x5/8 bolt, 1/4 lock washer and 1/4 flat washer. 3. If the Thor VM3 is not already mounted to the dock, Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16). 4. Adjust the Thor VM3 to the desired viewing angle. 5. Torque the 14-20 bolts to 50 in/lbs (5.6 N/m). 4 - 25 Connect Cables There are many cables available for the Thor VM3 including power cables, and data/ communication cablesThor VM3. Strain Relief Cable Clamps Equipment Required: Phillips screwdriver (not supplied by Honeywell) There are five strain relief cable clamps secured to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. Use the strain relief clamps to secure audio, power, and I/O cables attached to the Thor VM3 dock. 1. Determine the proper strain relief cable clamp. There are three sizes of cable clamps on the Thor VM3 which should be matched to the cable to be secured. For example, the largest clamp (on the left when viewing the back of the Thor VM3) is designed to secure the power cable. 2. Remove the strain relief clamp from the Thor VM3 by turning the screw counterclockwise. Put the screw aside in a safe location. 3. Slide the strain relief clamp over the cable. 4. Using a Phillips screwdriver and the screw that was removed, refasten the clamp holding the cable to the Quick Mount. Do not stretch the cable. Leave enough slack in the cable to allow it to be connected and disconnected easily when needed. 5. Continue in this manner until all cables are secured to the Thor VM3 dock. 4 - 26 Connect Power Power options include:
12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (see page 4-28) - Direct connection to vehicle power. 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (see page 4-33) - Requires the use of a DC/
DC power supply. 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (see page 4-37) - Requires the use of a DC/
DC power supply.
VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable (see page 4-41) - For applications where the Thor VM3 replaces a previously installed VX6 or VX7. Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable (see page 4-42) - For applications where the Thor VM3 replaces a previously installed Thor VX8 or Thor VX9.
Screen Blanking (see page 4-43) - Optional connection to blank the Thor VM3 display while the vehicle is in motion.
External AC/DC Power Supply (see page 4-46) - For use when DC power is not available to power the Thor VM3, such as in an office environment. See Power Supply Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinout Power Cable Cautions
!
CAUTION - When routing the power cable:
Route power cable away from the outside of the fork truck.
Choose a mounting location so that the power cable does no t extend outside the vehicle and that provides sufficient clearance so that the power cable (especially the dock connector end) is not pressed against part of the vehicle.
Use the proper Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26) to secure cable.
The power cable is less flexible in low te mperature environments. Avoid sharp bends. Regularly inspect power cable for damage, especially in low temperature environments. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for replacement cable options. Power Cable Routing Power cable with straight connector Power cable with right-angle connector Avoid sharp bends in this area of the power cable 4 - 27
12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection)
!
CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only.
!
!
Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27). Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Wire Color Red Red/White Black Black/White Green Blue Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
DC -
Ground Ignition Input (optional) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (optional) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See the figures below for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 10-60VDC Direct Power Connection 1. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 2. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-28), connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle (if using unswitched power). 3. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Please select electrical connectors sized for use with 20AWG (0.81mm2) conductors. 4. Refer to the wiring diagrams following this section for wire colors and connections:
Ignition Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-30) 4 - 28
Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-31)
Manual Control Wiring Diagram (page 4-32) 5. Route the power cable the shortest way possible removing any left-over cable. The cable is rated for a maxi-
mum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 6. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 7. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 8. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 9. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 10. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 11. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 12. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 29 Ignition Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Ignition Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue Circular Power Connector
. See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassi s ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 30 Auto-On Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected) Circular Power Connector
. See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire is connected to battery negative. If ther e is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassi s ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 31 Manual Control Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below Quick Mount Smart Dock Cable for optional screen blanking connection COM1 or COM2 Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected) Circular Power Connector See Caution statement below
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire must be connected to battery negative. If there is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
Red wire is connected to battery positive. If t here is a red wire and a red/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery positive.
Black wire is connected to battery negative. If ther e is a black wire and a black/white wire, twist them together and connect to battery negative.
Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassi s ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve-
hicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 12VDC input, use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC.
For 24VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC.
For 36VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC.
For 48VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 32 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) This option requires DC/DC external power supply Honeywell Part no. 9000313PWRSPLY. Shown With Lid Attached
Lid is secured with screws on the side of lid. Shown With Lid Removed Input and output connector blocks under lid.
One positive (Vin+), negative (Vin-) and ground (
connection in input block.
)
One positive (Vo+) and negative (Vo-) connection in output block. CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27). If the DC/DC power supply does not have screws in the side of the lid, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37).
!
!
!
!
CAUTION - Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided. The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure. Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used, 4 - 33
Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
Wire Color Red (2 wires) Black (2 wires)
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Green Blue Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See Wiring Diagram (page 4-36) for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection 1. Please review the Wiring Diagram (page 4-36), before beginning power cable install. 2. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 3. Route the cable from the Thor VM3 to the DC/DC power supply. Route the power cable the shortest way pos-
sible. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). When routing this cable, it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 4. Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends. 5. Remove the lid from the DC/DC power supply. 6. Connect the stripped end of the positive wires (red and red/white twisted together or a single red wire) to the output block. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-34). 7. Connect the stripped end of the negative wires (black and black/white twisted together or a single black wire) to the output. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-34). Note: The input block has VIN+, VIN- and GND terminals. The output block has VO+ and VO- terminals. 4 - 34 8. Connect the ground (green) wire from the Thor VM3 to the GND terminal on the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 9. Route the wiring from the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system. Do not connect to vehicle power at this time. 10. Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 11. Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown. 12. Reattach the cover with the screws. 13. Connect the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system as directed below:
!
For battery powered vehicles:
VIN+ is connected to battery positive. ViN- must be connected to battery negative. GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
VIN+ is connected to battery positive. ViN- is connected to battery negative. GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 14. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-33) connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle. When available, always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel, after providing proper fusing. ATTENTION: For uninterrupted power, electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle. 15. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG (1mm2) conductors. 16. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket. 17. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely.Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On. 18. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 19. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 20. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 21. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 22. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. Note:
Ignition control is not available for trucks over 60VDC. 4 - 35 Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Forklift Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below See Caution statement below GND VIN+
VIN-
VO+
VO-
DC/DC Power Supply User supplied serial cable for optional screen blanking connection, see below Quick Mount Smart Dock COM1 or COM2 Connector on Dock Circular Power Connector on Dock Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected)
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used 4 - 36 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) This option requires DC/DC power supply Honeywell Part no. VX89303PWRSPLY, shown below. Shown With Lid Attached
Lid is secured with screws on the top of lid. Shown With Lid Removed Input and output connector blocks under lid.
Two positive (+), negative (-) and ground (
connections per terminal block
) CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. If the DC/DC power supply does not have screws in the top of the lid, see 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33).
!
!
CAUTION - The VX89303PWRSPLY power supply is sealed per IPXX. Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided. The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure. Use caution when routing the power cable. See Power Cable Cautions (page 4-27).
!
!
Fuse Requirements WARNING - For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 37
Power Cable Identification The DC power cable (included with the dock) is one of the two styles below:
Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires:
Wire Color Red (2 wires) Black (2 wires)
!
Twist the red and red/white wires together and twist the black and black/white wires together before connecting to vehicle power. Green Blue Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires:
Connection DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Wire Color Connection Red Black Green Blue DC + (10-60 VDC) DC -
Ground Ignition Input (not used) Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. See Wiring Diagram (page 4-40) for additional wire color-coding specifics. The Thor VM3 DC input wires (Red, Red/White DC+ and Black, Black/White DC-) and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated. The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection. Vehicle 50-150VDC Power Connection 1. Please review the Wiring Diagram (page 4-36), before beginning power cable install. 2. The Thor VM3 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. The power switch on the dock must be turned Off. The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock. 3. Route the cable from the Thor VM3 to the DC/DC power supply. Route the power cable the shortest way pos-
sible. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). When routing this cable, it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 4. Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends. 5. Remove the lid from the DC/DC power supply. 6. Connect the stripped end of the positive wires (red and red/white twisted together or a single red wire) to the output block. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-38). 7. Connect the stripped end of the negative wires (black and black/white twisted together or a single black wire) to the output. See Power Cable Identification (page 4-38). Note: The input and output blocks each have two + (plus), two
(minus) and two
(ground) connectors. Either connector in the block can be used to connect the matching polarity wire. 4 - 38 8. Route the wiring from the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system. Do not connect to vehicle power at this time. 9. Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC/DC power supply. 10. Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown. 11. Reattach the cover with the screws. 12. Connect the DC/DC power supply to the vehicles electrical system as directed below
!
For battery powered vehicles:
+ is connected to battery positive.
- must be connected to battery negative.:
must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
+ is connected to battery positive.
- is connected to battery negative. is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 13. While observing the Fuse Requirements (see page 4-37), connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle. When available, always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel, after providing proper fusing. ATTENTION: For uninterrupted power, electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle. 14. Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG (1mm2) conductors. 15. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket. 16. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely.Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On. 17. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 18. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 19. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 20. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 21. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. Note:
Ignition control is not available for trucks over 60VDC. 4 - 39 Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Forklift Battery Main Switch
+Vo
-Vo Fuse - See Warning statement below See Caution statement below
+
-
+
-
DC/DC Power Supply User supplied serial cable for optional screen blanking connection, see below Quick Mount Smart Dock COM1 or COM2 Connector Power Connector Red/White (if present) Red Black/White (if present) Black Green Blue
(not connected)
!
!
CAUTION For battery powered vehicles:
must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. WARNING For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the batterys positive (+) terminal. The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse with a current rating as noted below.
For 60VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC.
For 72VDC input, use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC.
For 96VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC.
For 108VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC.
For 120VDC input, use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC.
For 132VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC.
For 144VDC input, use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. 4 - 40 VX6 / VX7 Adapter Cable An adapter cable is available to attach the Thor VM3 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX6/VX7 DC power cable. The adapter cable has a 5-pin connector to match with the VX6/VX7 power supply cable on one end and a 6-pin con-
nector to match to the Thor VM3 on the other end. This section assumes the VX6/VX7 power cable is properly con-
nected to vehicle power. Refer to the VX6 or VX7 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details.
!
CAUTION - Because the Thor supports 10-60 VDC power input, verify input voltages before using this adapt-
er cable with an existing VX6 or VX7 power connection installation. To Power Connector on Dock To VX6/VX7 Power Supply Cable When this adapter cable is used, there is no provision for an ignition switch input. Therefore the vehicle ignition moni-
toring function is not available when using this cable. Connect to VX6 / VX7 Power Cable 1. Connect the cable to the Thor VM3 power cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 2. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be pro-
tected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. 3. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 4. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 5. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 6. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 7. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch. 8. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 9. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 41 Thor VX8 / Thor VX9 Adapter Cable An adapter cable is available to attach the Thor VM3 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX8/VX9 DC power cable. The adapter cable has a 6-pin connector to match the VX8/XVX9 power supply cable on one end and a 6-pin connec-
tor to match the Thor VM3 on the other end. The cable also has bare wires for ground and ignition sense connection plus a D9 cable to connect to a COM port on the Thor VM3 dock to provide a screen blanking signal. This section assumes the VX8/VX9 power cable is properly connected to vehicle power. Refer to the VX8 or VX9 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details. To VX8/VX9 Power Cable To Ground and Ignition Sense To COM port on Dock To Power Connector on Dock Connect to Thor VX8 / VX9 Power Cable 1. Connect the cable to the Thor VX8/VX9 power cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector;
push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 2. Connect the green wire to vehicle ground:
!
For battery powered vehicles:
The green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles:
The green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground, which can also be battery negative. 3. 4. If ignition control will be used, connect the blue wire to an ignition switched circuit (less than 1mA over input voltage range). If ignition control is not used, the blue wire can be left disconnected, If the VX8/VX9 cable is connected to a screen blanking box or switch, connect the D9 connector to a COM port on the dock. 5. The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105C (221F). Therefore, when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature. Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts. Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe opera-
tion and maintenance of the vehicle. 6. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter-
vals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 7. Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 8. Secure the power cable to the Thor VM3 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 9. Place Thor VM3 in the Dock (page 4-16) 10. If using the Screen Blanking (page 4-43) feature, install the screen blanking box or switch if not previously installed. 11. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 12. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 42 Screen Blanking Prerequisite: The steps outlined in either 12-48 VDC Vehicles (10-60 VDC Direct Connection) (page 4-28), 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Side of Lid) (page 4-33) or 60-144 VDC Vehicles (50-150 VDC Power Supply, Screws on Top of Lid) (page 4-37) have been completed. Screen blanking is accomplished by either a Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch.
!
!
CAUTION - For proper and safe installation, the input power lead to the Screen Blanking Box requires a 3 Amp maximum time delay (slow blow) high interrupting rating fuse. Note: For North America, a UL Listed fuse is to be used. CAUTION - For installation by trained service personnel only. Screen Blanking Cable Refer to Screen Control (in the Windows Control Panel) to configure the Thor VM3 for screen blanking. When routing any additional cables for screen blanking:
Route the cable the shortest way possible removing any left-over cable
Fuses and cabling are user supplied. Therefore, route these cables so they are protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed the cable's rated temperature threshold.
Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts
Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil th at may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate
Always route the cable so that it does not interf ere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle.
Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable An optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable is available. DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Wire color 1 -6, 9 7 (RTS) 8 (CTS) Not Used Connected to Screen Blanking Box, unswitched side Black (see note) Connected to Screen Blanking Box, switched side Gray (see note) Note: Wire colors only apply to optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE. Wire colors may vary in a user-supplied cable. The optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE, is installed as follows:
1. Connect the gray wire of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box. 2. Connect the black wire of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box. 3. Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. 4 - 43 User-Supplied Cable A user-supplied cable can be used as well. Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as detailed below. No other pins are to be connected. PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 8 PIN 7 DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Function with Switch 1 -6, 9 7 (RTS) 8 (CTS) Not Used Connected to Screen Blanking Box, unswitched side Connected to Switch Connected to Screen Blanking Box, switched side Connected to Switch Not Used The user-supplied cable is installed as follows:
1. Connect the wire from Pin 8 of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user-sup-
plied switch. 2. Connect the wire from Pin 7 of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user-
supplied switch. 3. Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock. Screen Blanking Box Screen Blanking Box Terminal Connection 12-xxV GND Unswitched Switched Input from vehicle motion sensing circuitry. Please refer to label on Screen Blanking Box for allowable voltage input range. DC -
These two terminals are for connecting a serial cable:
If using an optional Honeywell screen blanking cable, VM1080CABLE, connect the gray wire to the switched side of the connection and connect the black wire to the unswitched side. If using a user-supplied cable, the cable mu st be constructed so that Pin 7 (RTS) connects to switched side of the connection and Pin 8 (CTS) connects to the unswitched side. It is assumed that the motion sensing circuitry in the illustrations below is powered by internal vehicle circuitry. Please refer to the appropriate illustration below for Screen Blanking Box wiring diagrams.
!
CAUTION - Do not exceed the maximum input voltage, either 60 or 72VDC, specified on the Screen Blanking Box label when using this configuration. 4 - 44
MOTION CIRCUITRY 3A fuse D N G i V
+
To -Vo on vehicle, i.e. Negative battery terminal To pin 7 of COM1 or COM2 To pin 8 of COM1 or COM2 Note: The black and gray wire colors in the illustration only apply to the optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable, VM1080CABLE. The wire colors may be different in a user-supplied cable. Screen Blanking with Switch In applications where it is impractical to use the screen blanking box due to vehicle voltage or lack of a motion sensing signal, screen blanking can be controlled via a user supplied switch or relay that provides an electrical conductive connection on vehicle motion. To pins 7 and 8 of COM1 or COM2 port on dock Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as shown in the illustration above. No other pins are to be connected. 4 - 45 External AC/DC Power Supply The optional external AC/DC power supply is for use in environments, such as an office, where DC power is not avail-
able. Note: The Honeywell-approved AC/DC Power Supply and Adapter Cable are only intended for use in a 25C (77F) maximum ambient temperature environment. In North America, this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC, mini-
mum 15W. Outside North America, this unit is intended for use with an IEC certified ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC, minimum 15W. The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V, 60Hz supply or, outside North America, to a 230V, 50Hz supply, using the appropriate detachable cordset. In all cases, connect to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp overcurrent protection (10 Amp for 230V circuits). AC Input Cable (US only) DC Output Cable To DC Output Cable To Dock Connect External Power Supply 1. Connect the provided detachable cordset (US only, all others must order cable separately) to the external power supply (IEC 320 connector). 2. Plug cordset into appropriate, grounded, electrical supply receptacle (AC mains). 3. Connect the DC Output Cable end to the corresponding connector on the Adapter Cable. 4. Connect the watertight connector end of the Adapter Cable to the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock Power Connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector; push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely. 5. Press the Power Switch (page 3-4) on the back of the Thor VM3 dock. 6. Press the Power Button (page 3-4) on the front of the Thor VM3 to turn on the Thor VM3. 4 - 46 Connect USB Host D9 Connector USB Host Connector USB Client Connector See USB Connector (page 8-6) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D9 connector firmly over the USB (or USB1) Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. The USB-host connector provides a connector for a USB device such as a USB thumb drive. 4. Secure the cables to the Thor VM3 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). Connect USB Client D9 Connector USB Host Connector USB Client Connector Connect Serial Device See COM1 and COM2 Connector (page 8-5) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the cable end connector firmly over the serial COM port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Turn the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. Secure the cables to the Thor VM3 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps (page 4-26). 4. Connect the other cable end to the desired serial device. 4 - 47 Connect a Tethered Scanner 1. The scanner cable is attached to either the COM1 or COM2 port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Connect the serial cable for the scanner as directed above. 3. When the Thor VM3 is powered on, it provides power to the serial scanner. 4. Configure the Data Collection (DC) Wedge to manipulate scanned data as desired. Connect Headset Cable The CANbus/Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus cable. The Thor VM3 does not support con-
necting audio and CANbus simultaneously. To headset To Audio connector on dock Headphones Microphone To Audio cable See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus/Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. click!
3. Slide the cable ends together until they click shut. Do not twist or bend the connectors. The Thor VM3 internal microphone and speakers are automatically disabled when the headset is connected. 4 - 48 Adjust Headset / Microphone and Secure Cable The headset consists of an earpiece, a microphone, a clothing clip and a cable. 1. Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone. The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth. 2. Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth. Note the small Talk label near the mouthpiece. Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth. The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing. 3. Follow the safety guidelines below when wearing the headset. Under Clothing
Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar.
Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head. Over Clothing
Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body.
Tuck the cable under the belt, but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt.
Do not wear the cable on the front of your body. It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects. Connect CANbus Cable The CANbus/Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus Y cable. The Thor VM3 does not support connecting audio and CANbus simultaneously. See CANbus / Audio Connector (page 8-9) for connector pinouts. 1. Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus/Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 2. Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction. Do not over tighten. 3. The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 (Deutsch) and 9 pin M SAE J1939 (Deutsch) connector. Connect the appropriate cable connector as needed. 4 - 49 Install Remote Antenna Remote antennas are available for the 802.11 WLAN radio, the WWAN radio and the GPS. 802.11 Remote Mount Antenna The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of two brackets
(base plate and right angle), cable, and antenna. Tools are not included. The desired remote antenna bracket is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. The Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna cannot be used by devices with an internal antenna. Components and Mounting Diagram Nut Washer Washer Bracket To antenna Antenna To antenna Bracket To antenna connector on computer 4 - 50 Typical Installation Antenna Mounting Bracket Vehicle Safety Cage Cable Vehicle Mounted Computer Mounting Instructions 1. Attach and secure the desired mounting bracket to the highest point on the safety cage, following these pre-
cautions:
The plate must be mounted so the antenna is not damag ed while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving.
The antenna mounting portion of the bra cket must be parallel to the floor. If using two antennas, they must be moun ted at least 12 inches (304.8mm) apart. 2. Attach the female connector of the coaxial cable to the antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 3. Secure the whip antenna to the mounting bracket. 4. Connect the antenna cable to the whip antenna. 5. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. 6. Connect the cable to the antenna connector (Wi-Fi Main or Wi-Fi Aux) on the Thor VM3. If only one antenna is used, be sure to connect it to the Wi-Fi Main connector. 7. Repeat the steps above for the second 802.11 antenna. 4 - 51
WAN Remote Mount Antenna The WAN remote mount antenna can be either a magnetic mount or an adhesive mount antenna. Magnetic Mount WAN Antenna Adhesive Mount WAN Antenna To extension cable To antenna To antenna connector on computer To extension cable To antenna To antenna connector on computer The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the WAN antenna and an extension cable. The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. 1. Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle, following these precautions:
The antenna must be mounted so the antenna is not dama ged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving. 2. Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted. 3. If using an adhesive mount antenna, remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna. 4. Position the antenna on the vehicle. 5. Attach the one end of the coaxial cable to the antenna and the other end to the Mobile Net WWAN connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 6. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. GPS Remote Mount Antenna The external GPS antenna is an adhesive mount antenna. The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the antenna and an integrated cable. The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift, truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM3 inside the vehicle. 1. Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle, following these precautions:
The antenna must be mounted so the antenna is not dama ged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving. 2. Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted. 3. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna and position the antenna on the vehicle. 4. Attach the connector on the coaxial cable to the GPS antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM3. 5. Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary. Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle. 4 - 52 Apply Touch Screen Protective Film The optional Thor VM3 touch screen protective film is shipped in packs of 10. The protective film is flexible and treated with an anti-glare coating on the outer surface. Installation 1. Make sure the touch screen is clean and dry before installation. See Cleaning (page 4-16) for instructions on suitable cleaning agents. 2. Pull the release tab to separate the protective backing from the rear of the protective film. Avoid touching the rear side of the protective film while removing the liner. 3. Place the rear side of the protective film against the Thor VM3 display, roughly centering the protective film over the display. 4. Slide the protective film until one corner can be slid back between the touch screen and the display housing as the protective film is re-centered on the display. It may be necessary to press the edges of the protective film against the display to ensure the entire edge slides under the display housing. It is easiest to start with one of the bottom corners. 5. Slide the protective film away from the other bottom corner. The film may bulge sligthly away from the Reference Guide as it is being slid. Only slide the protective film enough so that the protective film can slide under the display housing on that corner when the protective film is returned to center. 6. Repeat with each of the top corners, sliding the protective film away from the corner just enough that the protective film can slide under the display housing when the protective film is returned to center. 7. It may be necessary to flex the protective film during the install, however use care not to flex the protective film so much that the protective film kinks. 8. Once all corners are secure under the display housing, adjust the protective film, if necessary, so it is centered on the touch screen. Removal 1. To remove the protective film, slide the protective film in one direction until the edge clears. 2. Lift up on the edge of the protective film so it does not slide between the touch screen and display housing when the protective film is slid back to the center. 3. Repeat until all edges are free and remove the protective film. 4 - 53 Disconnect UPS Battery
!
CAUTION - The UPS battery must be disconnected before you ship the Thor VM3 or Replace Front Panel (page 4-58). Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Disconnect Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the small push button located just below the SIM card installation slot. 6. Press the push button to disconnect the UPS. The UPS battery maintains its charge but is disconnected from the power circuitry of the Thor VM3. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the M3 screws to 4-5 inch pounds using a #2 Phillips bit. 8. When the Thor VM3 is attached to external power, the UPS battery is automatically reconnected. 9. Restart the Thor VM3. 4 - 54 Install SD Card An SD card slot is provided for storage expansion. Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
SD card - The following commercially available SD cards are recommended:
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the SD card installation slot. 6. Slide the SD card into the slot. The label side (front) of the SD card faces toward the back of the Thor VM3. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the screws to 4-5 inch pounds. 8. If removed, reinstall the Thor VM3 in the dock. 4 - 55 Install SLC Drive An mSATA card slot is provided for storage expansion. Only mSATA drives are supported.
!
Only mSATA drives are supported. Connecto r pin 43 is not connected on an mSATA drive.
mPCIe drives are not supported. Connec tor pin 43 is grounded on an mPCIe drive.
Connecting an mCPIe drive can result in system instability such as a failure to boot or non-functional accessories such as keyboard or mouse. Connecting an mPCIe drive (connector pin 43 is grounded) can cause he Thor VM3 Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds mSATA card - The following commercially available mSATA cards are recommended:
SMART Modular SG9MST3D4GBS01 4 - 56 Install SIM Card A SIM card may be required for WWAN. Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
SIM card for desired carrier
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1. For convenience, the Thor VM3 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock, though it is not necessary. 2. If the Thor VM3 remains in the dock, disconnect the power cable from the dock. 3. Place the Thor VM3 face down on a stable surface. 4. Using a #2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label. This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM3 is face down with the top away from the user. 5. Locate the SIM card installation slot. 6. Slide the SIM card into the slot. 7. Reattach the access panel, torquing the screws to 4-5 inch pounds. 8. If removed, reinstall the Thor VM3 in the dock. 4 - 57 Replace Front Panel Equipment Required The following equipment is user-supplied:
Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds
#2 Phillips screwdriver bit Replacement Procedure
!
CAUTION - Before replacing the Thor VM3 front panel, Disconnect UPS Battery (page 4-54). 9. Carefully lift the front panel away from the device. 10. Gently press the front panel into place. 11. Tighten the captive M3 screws. In the order shown in the top figure above, use a #2 Phillips bit and torque the screws to 6-7 inch pounds. 12. Reinstall the Thor VM3 in the Quick Mount Smart Dock. 13. When the Thor VM3 is placed in the powered dock, the UPS battery automatically reconnects. 14. Restart the Thor VM3. 15. Remove the old battery and set it aside. 16. Inspect the battery well to verify the two foam pads are still in place. 17. Align the wiring connector on the new UPS battery with the connector on the Thor VM3. Gently press the connector into place until the retaining tab snaps into place. 18. Place the UPS battery into the well. Note the orientation of the battery in the illustration below. The flat surface of the battery points toward the bottom of the Thor VM3. Make sure all wires are inside the battery well so they are not pinched when the front panel is reinstalled. 4 - 58
1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual-2 | Users Manual | 1.25 MiB |
5 Software Microsoft Windows Setup and Configuration After the system files are processed, Microsoft Windows begins to load. Windows maintains a System Registry and INI files. Standard Windows configuration options apply to the Thor VM3. Configuration options are located in the System Tray or the Control Panel:
The System Tray contains icons for adjusting the time, date or volume level.
The Control Panel contains icons for many other configurat ion options, such as Power Management, Regional and Language Options, etc.
The Control Panel icons are also used to add, dele te or modify software installed on the Thor VM3. Drive C Folder Structure Microsoft Windows is installed in the \Windows folder. In addition, Microsoft Windows creates other folders and several subfolders. For more information on the folder structure, please refer to commercially available Microsoft Windows OS ref-
erence guides. Software Loaded on Drive C The software loaded on the Thor VM3 computer consists of:
BIOS
Microsoft operating system (Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
device drivers radio software see Wireless Configuration Utility touch screen software The software installed on the Thor VM3 is summarized below. Note: Due to the complex folder structure and System Registry under Microsoft Windows, software should not be removed manually. Instead use the Windows Control Panel:
Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows is installed in the \Windows subfolder, which is the Windows default. In addition, Windows places files in other folders and subfolders during installation. For more information, please refer to commercially available Microsoft Windows OS user guides. Device Drivers Device drivers are installed for all installed hardware options, such as the display, touch screen, radios, etc. For more information on Microsoft Windows device drivers, please refer to commercially available Windows OS refer-
ence guides. Radio Software The Thor VM3 is delivered with the radio software installed. Because the Thor VM3 uses a Microsoft Windows operating system, the radio installation includes Windows device drivers. Touch Screen Software PenMount Universal software is installed for calibrating the touch screen. See Touch Screen Calibration (page 5-
13) for more information. RFTerm Start > All Programs > Honeywell RFTerm 5 - 1
Optional terminal emulation software. The application can also be accessed by double-clicking the RFTerm desk-
top icon.
!
For Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Embedded 7:
It is necessary to run to run RFTerm as an administrator when modifying settings because RFTerm must be able to access and make changes to the Windows registry. Rather than selecting to run as administrator each time, right click on the RFTerm icon and select Proper-
ties. Tap the Compatibility tab and check Run this program as an administrator. This modification af-
fects the current user only unless Change settings for all users is tapped before changing the privilege level. Summit Client Utility Start > Control Panel > Wi-Fi, or SCU icon on desktop Manage wireless clients installed in the Thor VM3. If the Summit Client Utility is not present, the Laird Configura-
tion Manager may be installed. Laird Configuration Manager LCM icon on desktop Manage wireless clients installed in the Thor VM3. If the Laird Configuration Manager is no present, the Summit Client Utility may be installed. 5 - 2 Control Panel Most control panel applets on the Thor VM3 are standard Microsoft Windows items. The control panels and other functions listed below may differ from a standard Microsoft Windows equipped PC or laptop. About Software Firmware Versions The Software tab lists the firmware versions installed. The BIOS, EC and Screen MCU firmware versions are shown on this tab. Language The Software tab displays the localized language version of the OS image. The language is identified as English or + an additional language. The Thor VM3 may be pre-loaded with an English only OS. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for informa-
tion on ordering a recovery DVD with an additional language. Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all installed software is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the Thor VM3. The Image line displays the revision of the system software installed. Refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level. Versions Tab and the Registry The Versions tab displays program version details from the registry. Customized information can be displayed by modifying the Registry using the Registry Editor. Use caution when editing the Registry and make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. The registry settings for the Version tab are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Version in the reg-
istry. To add a user application to the Version panel, create a new string value under the HKLM\Software\LXE\Version key. The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window. Version strings can be equal to or less than 254 characters. Because the strings are displayed in a text box, any number can be accommodated, up to the 64K byte text box limitation. Network IP 5 - 3 MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the network card(s) such as the Summit WLAN radio and the Bluetooth module. 1. 5 - 4 Display Start > Control Panel > Display (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes (Category View) The Thor VM3 supports a pixel display resolution. Screen Rotation (page 5-11) Screen Blanking (page 5-10) are configured on separate control panels. 5 - 5 Power Options Select a Power Scheme Power Schemes Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Category View) 5 - 6 View UPS Battery Status Power Meter Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Category View) On the Power Meter tab, battery #1 refers to the UPS battery. Shows power status: external power or UPS battery and the total battery power remaining before a recharge is necessary. Configure Power Button Behavior Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Advanced tab (Category View) Advanced The Advanced panel allows setting the power button behavior when the unit is on and the power button is pressed. Options are:
Do nothing
Ask me what to do
Stand by
Shut down. The default is to shut down. The Thor VM3 performs an orderly shut down when the power key is pressed when this option is enabled. 5 - 7 Hibernate Enable Hibernation Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Hibernate tab (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance> Power Options > Hibernate tab (Category View) By default, hibernate is on the Thor VM3. The default can be changed on this page. The disk space necessary for hibernation plus the free disk space on the hard drive are listed. 5 - 8 Screen Control Start > Control Panel > Screen (Classic View) Set screen properties for the Thor VM3. Factory Default Settings Screen Blanking (Blackout) Enable screen blanking Screen on delay (ms) COM Port Current Level LCD Brightness (%) Enabled 1000 COM1 100 (see note) Note: There is no default value for Ambient Light % as it varies depending on the level of light where the Thor VM3 is located. 5 - 9 Screen Blanking Screen blanking allows the Thor VM3 display to automatically be turned off whenever the vehicle is in motion. Use the Screen on delay to specify the period of time in ms (milliseconds) between when the vehicle stops and the Thor VM3 screen turns on. For example, use the delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicles accel-
erator pedal. Release of the accelerator may mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary. Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop. The default value is 1000 ms. Specify the COM Port to which the screen blanking cable is attached. If a COM port is in use by another application, that COM port is grayed out and cannot be selected for screen blanking.
!
Do not enable Screen Blanking until the cable is properly connected to the specified COM port. To disable screen blanking, uncheck the Enable screen blanking checkbox. See Screen Blanking (page 4-53) for hardware requirements. Refer to the wiring instructions, including appropriate cautions and warnings, in the Connect Power (page 4-35) sec-
tion. 5 - 10 Screen Rotation Start > Control Panel > Screen Rotation (Classic view) The Screen Rotation panel provides options for rotating the display:
0 Degree - Returns screen to the default orientation. 90 Degree - Rotates the screen counter clockwise 90 degrees as compared to the default orientation. 180 Degree - Rotates the screen 180 degrees as compared to the default orientation. 270 Degree - Rotates the screen counter clockwise 270 degrees as compared to the default orientation. Select the desired rotation and tap OK. The screen may briefly go blank during the rotation process. Tap Close to dismiss the panel and keep the current screen rotation. Sounds Start > Control Panel > Sounds and Audio Devices (Classic View) Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech and Audio Devices (Category View) Use the slider bar to adjust the volume level as desired. Alternatively:
Tap the Volume icon, if present, in the taskbar and move the slider until the volume level is as desired. User Accounts Note: The following applies to a Thor VM3 that is not part of a domain. When the Thor VM3 is part of a domain, the user is prompted for credentials at Windows startup or log on. The Thor VM3 is pre-configured with an administrator account named Administrator. By default, the Thor VM3 automati-
cally logs onto the Administrator account at Windows startup. If the user assigns a password to the Administrator account:
The password is stored and used when the Thor VM3 logs ont o the Administrator account at Windows startup. The user is not prompted to enter a password. If the user logs off, the password must be manually entered to log back onto the Thor VM3.
At the logon prompt, the user could specify a different user account (and password, if necessary) to log on, assuming the account has been added to the Thor VM3. 5 - 11
When the Thor VM3 is restarted, the Administrator account automatically becomes the active user account, regardless of the active account before the restart. If using the Windows Certificate Store (page 6-17) the user must assign a password to the active (Administrator) account. Sounds By default the side tone is muted. If needed, the user should enable the side tone. If this causes interfering noise, the side tone should be disabled. The VM3 audio is designed to be used with or without the side tone. This is acceptable permissi-
ble performance for the Thor VM3. Wi-Fi Start > Control Panel > Wi-Fi (Classic view) Provides a shortcut to access the 802.11a/b/g/n radio configuration utility. Tap the Wi-Fi icon to access the Summit Client Utility (page 6-1). 5 - 12 Bar Code Readers The Thor VM3 can use the following external bar code readers:
Tethered hand-held scanners are tethered to a serial port or a USB host port (via a dongle cable) on the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock and are configured by scanning the engine-specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer's programming guide. The manufacturer's guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader.
Wireless hand-held Bluetooth scanners are configured by scanning the engine-specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer's programming guide. The manufacturer's guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader.
The body worn Bluetooth Ring Scanner module may be usi ng a Symbol 4400 Ring Imager or a Symbol 955 Ring Scanner. The BTRS module is configured by scanning the bar codes in the Bluetooth Ring Scanner Guide. Scanner Wedge Honeywell provides Freefloat Link*One for bar code decoding needs on the Thor VM3. Refer to the Freefloat website for documentation on Freefloat Link*One. Touch Screen Calibration Start > Programs > PenMount Windows Universal Driver To calibrate the touch screen, tap Start > Programs > PenMount Universal Driver > Utility > PenMount Control Panel. Select PenMount 6000 USB and then tap Configure. Select Standard Calibration or Advance Calibration. Advanced Calibration allows the user to select the number of calibration points. With either option, follow the on screen instructions to touch the red square, hold the touch and then lift the stylus to complete the calibration process. 5 - 13 BIOS The Microsoft Windows operating system is installed before shipping. The default BIOS parameters are configured at that time. In most cases, it is unnecessary to modify the BIOS parameters. Generally, it is only necessary to enter the BIOS setup to change the boot order of the drives. This section is not intended to detail all features of the BIOS, instead it is intended to cover the most commonly used setup options.
!
CAUTION - Be very careful when using this utility to modify BIOS Setup parameters. The Thor VM3 may generate unex-
pected results when incorrect or conflicting parameter values are entered. Selecting incorrect or invalid options may re-
quire the Thor VM3 to be returned for repairs. The parameters should only be modified by Information Services personnel or the system administrator. Accessing the BIOS Setup When the Embedded BIOS screen (Phoenix Technologies) is displayed press the Del key to enter BIOS setup. Use the arrow keys to move around the screen. To access and modify the BIOS on the Thor VM3, an external keyboard must be attached. Boot Order To view or edit the boot order, select the Boot tab. By default, the first device in the boot order is USB Hard Drive. The second device is the Windows CE Image.
!
If a USB drive, such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM3, the device attempts to boot from the USB drive:
If the USB drive contains a bootable sect or, the Thor VM3 boots from the USB drive. If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector, the Thor VM3 does not boot. Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM3 again. Exiting BIOS Setup To exit the BIOS setup, select the Exit tab and select one of these options:
Save Setting and Restart
Exit Setup without Saving Changes
Reload Factory-Defaults and Restart Thor VM3 Recovery DVD A recovery DVD is available to restore the operating system on your Thor VM3 to the same state it had when it was shipped from the factory. The recovery DVD may not reload all factory installed software. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for information on the recovery DVD and for assistance installing other factory loaded software. 5 - 14
Windows Embedded Standard 2009 1. Locate the CCU icon either on the desktop or by selecting 2. Double-tap the icon to launch the CCU. Windows Embedded Standard 7 and Windows 7 Professional:
3. 4. Using Configuration Cloning Utility GUI 5 - 15 5 - 16 6 Wireless Network Connections Network Connections Control Panel For best results, do not use the Network Connections panel (Start > Control Panel > Network Connections) to disable the Summit wireless adapter. Due to a limitation of the system architecture, if the Summit wireless adapter is disabled in the Net-
work Connections panel, it cannot be re-enabled from this control panel. Instead, the Thor VM3 must be rebooted to enable the Summit wireless adapter. The Device Manager (Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager) can be used to disable and enable the Summit wireless adapter without rebooting the Thor VM3. Summit Wireless Network Configuration The Summit client device is a Summit 802.11a/b/g/n radio, capable of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n data rates. The radio can be configured for no encryption, WEP encryption or WPA security. Security Options Supported are Important Notes It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certifi-
cates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
!
It may be necessary to upgrade radio software in order to use certain Summit Client Utility (SCU) features. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) for details. When using the 802.11a radio, the U-NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation. For regulatory domains in which the U-NII 3 band is allowed, the following channels are supported: 149, 153, 157 and 161. The AP must be con-
figured accordingly. After making any changes to the wireless configuration, restart the Thor VM3. Summit Client Utility Note: When making changes to profile or global parameters, the device should be restarted afterwards. Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility or SCU Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon (if present) or Wi-FI Icon in the Windows Control Panel (if present) The Main tab provides information, admin login and active profile selection. Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab. The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile. The Status tab contains information on the current connection. The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio. Global parameters are found on the Global tab. The values for these parameters apply to all profiles. Summit Tray Icon The Summit tray icon is not shown when the Thor VM3 is running Windows Embedded Standard 2009. The Windows Wireless icon (located in the taskbar) may not display a successful wireless connection. The SCU Main tab should be used to verify the success of the connection instead. 6 - 1 Wireless Zero Config Utility
The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar indicating t he Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time (the device is not connected to a network). The WZC icon may not be visible until control is passed to the WZC utility as described below.
You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Util ity or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. The Summit Client Utility is recommended because the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio. To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility 1. Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down box on the Main tab. 2. A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly. 3. Tap OK. 4. Restart the Thor VM3. The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel. Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels, set up radio and security settings. There may be a slight delay before the Wireless Zero Config icon indicates the status of the connection. To Switch Control to SCU 1. To switch back to SCU control, select any other profile except ThirdPartyConfig in the SCU Active Config drop down list on the Main tab. 2. A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly. 3. Tap OK. 4. Restart the Thor VM3. Radio control is passed to the SCU. 6 - 2 Main Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Main tab Factory Default Settings Admin Login Radio Active Config/Profile Regulatory Domain SUMMIT Enabled Default FCC, ETSI or Worldwide The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including:
SCU (Summit Client Utility) version
Driver version
Radio Type (ABGN is an 802.11 a/b/g/n radio).
Regulatory Domain
Copyright Information can be accessed by tapping the About SCU button
Active Config profile / Active Profile name
Status of the client (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc.). The Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode. Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Administrator mode. The profile must already exist. Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin login password has been entered and accepted. When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile, the Summit Client Utility passes control to Wire-
less Manager for configuration of all client and security settings for the network module. The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the network card. Once disabled, the button label changes to Enable Radio. By default the radio is enabled. The Admin Login button provides access to editing wireless parameters. Profile and Global may only be edited after enter-
ing the Admin Login password. The password is case-sensitive. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. To logout, either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button. Admin Login To login to Administrator mode, tap the Admin Login button. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited. The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button, or the OK button to logout. 6 - 3 Enter the Admin password (the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive) and tap OK. If the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed. The Administrator default password can be changed on the tab. The end-user can:
Turn the radio on or off on the Main tab.
Select an active Profile on the Main tab.
View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab.
View the global parameter settings on the Global tab.
View the current connection details on the Status tab.
View radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab.
Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab. After Admin Login, the end-user can also:
Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab.
Edit global parameters on the Global tab.
Enable/disable the Summit tray icon in the taskbar. 6 - 4 Profile Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Profile tab Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Factory Default Settings Profile SSID Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate Radio Mode Auth Type EAP Type Encryption Default Blank Blank CAM Maximum Auto BGA rates full Open None None When logged in as an Admin use the Profile tab to manage profiles. When not logged in as an Admin, the parameters can be viewed, and cannot be changed. The buttons on this tab are dimmed if the user is not logged in as Admin. The Profile tab was previously labeled Config. Buttons Button Function Commit Credentials Delete New Rename Saves the profile settings made on this screen. Settings are saved in the profile. Allows entry of a username and password, certificate names, and other information required to authen-
ticate with the access point. The information required depends on the EAP type. Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted. Creates a new profile with the default settings (see Profile Parameters) and prompts for a unique name. If the name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created. Assigns a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed. 6 - 5 Button Scan Function Opens a window that lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs. Tap the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs. Each APs SSID, its received signal strength indication (RSSI) and whether or not data encryption is in use (true or false). Sort the list by tapping on the column headers. If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID, the list displays the AP with the strongest RSSI and the least security. If you are logged in as an Admin, tap an SSID in the list and tap the Configure button, you return to the Profile window to recreate a profile for that SSID, with the profile name being the same as the SSID (or the SSID with a suffix such as _1 if a profile with the SSID as its name exists already). Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption. WEP Keys /
PSK Keys Note: Unsaved Changes The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from this tab. Important The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen. Profile Parameters Parameter Explanation Default Edit Profile Default SSID Client Name Blank Blank Power Save CAM A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters, establishes the name of the Profile. Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig. A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Establishes the Service Set Iden-
tifier (SSID) of the WLAN to which the client connects. A string of up to 16 characters. The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card. The client name may be passed to net-
working wireless devices, e.g. Access Points. Power save mode. Options are: Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) power save off, Maximum (power saving mode) and Fast (power saving mode). When using power management, use FAST for best throughput results. Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current Auto Open None regulatory domain. Options are: Maximum, 50mW, 30mW, 20mW, 10mW, 5mW, or 1mW. Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the client device. Options are: Auto, 1 Mbit, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit. 802.11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point. Options are: Open, LEAP, or Shared key. Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used for 802.1x authentication to the Access Point. Options are: None, LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, PEAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS. EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop-up window. Tx Power Bit Rate Auth Type EAP Type 6 - 6 Parameter Encryption Default Explanation None Radio Mode BGA Rates Full Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data. Available options may vary by SCU version. Options are: None, WEP (or Manual WEP), WEP EAP (or Auto WEP), WPA PSK, WPA TKIP, WPA CCKM, WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, or WPA2 CCKM. CKIP is not supported in the Thor VM3. Note: The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP Keys / PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop-up window. Specify 802.11a, 802.11b and/or 802.11g rates when communicating with the AP. The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio in-
stalled in the mobile device. Options:
B rates only (1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps) BG Rates Full (All B and G rates) G rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) BG optimized or BG subset (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 24, 36 and 54 Mbps) A rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) ABG Rates Full (All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred) BGA Rates Full (All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred) Ad Hoc (when connecting to another client device instead of an AP) Default:
BGA Rates Full It is important the Radio Mode parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect. For example, if this parameter is set to G rates only, the Thor VM3 may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates. 6 - 7 Status Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Status tab This screen provides information on the radio:
The profile being used.
The status of the radio card (dow n, associated, authenticated, etc.).
Client information including device name, IP address and MAC address. Information about the Access Point (AP) maintaining the c onnection to the network including AP name, IP address and MAC address.
Channel currently being used for wireless traffic.
Bit rate in Mbit.
Current transmit power in mW.
Beacon period the time between AP beacons in kilomicr oseconds. (one kilomicrosecond = 1,024 microseconds).
DTIM interval A multiple of the beaco n period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them. For example, if DTIM = 3, then every third beacon contains a DTIM.
Signal strength (RSSI) displayed in dBm and graphically.
Signal quality, a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and graphically. There are no user entries on this screen. Note: After completing radio configuration, it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as indicated above. 6 - 8
Diags Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Diags tab The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues.
(Re)connect Use this button to apply (or reapply) the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen.
Release/Renew Obtain a new IP address through release and renew. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio, this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button.
Start Ping Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button. Once the button is clicked, the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping. Clicking the button ends the ping. The ping also ends when any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags tab. The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box.
Diagnostics Also attempts to (re)connect to the wireless LAN. However, this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the (Re)connect option. This data dump includes radio state, profile settings, global settings, and a list of broadcast SSID APs.
Save To Use this to save the results of the diagnostics to a text file. Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file. The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad. 6 - 9
Global Start > All Programs > Summit > Summit Client Utility > Global tab The parameters on this panel can only be changed when an with a password. The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password. Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Factory Default Settings
-65 dBm 5 dBm 10 sec. Full Off 120 ms. 1 On Optimized On Type 1 Auto-EAP Standard Off (dimmed) On On Start on Main 2346 2347 Off On On SUMMIT (or blank) 8 seconds C:\Program Files\Summit\certs 32 bytes 5000 ms 1000 ms Use SCU credentials Roam Trigger Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set DFS Channels DFS Scan Time Ad Hoc Channel Aggressive Scan CCX Features WMM Auth Server TTLS Inner Method PMK Caching WAPI TX Diversity RX Diversity Frag Threshold RTS Threshold LED Tray Icon Hide Passwords Admin Password Auth Timeout Certs Path Ping Payload Ping Timeout Ping Delay ms Logon Options 6 - 10 Custom Parameter Option The parameter value is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a value that is not available from the parameters drop down list. Selecting Custom from the drop down list has no effect. Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the custom value in the registry. Global Parameters Parameter Function Default Roam Trigger
-65 dBm Roam Delta 5 dBm Roam Period 10 sec. BG Channel Set Full DFS Channels Off DFS Scan Time 120 ms. Ad Hoc Channel 1 If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the client looks for a dif-
ferent Access Point with a stronger signal. Options are: -50 dBm, -55, -60, -65, -70, -75, -80, -85, -90 dBm or . The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must ex-
ceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the dif-
ferent Access Point is attempted. Options are: 5 dBm, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 dBm or Custom. The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam, that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) scan data before a roaming decision is made. Options are: 5 sec, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 seconds or Custom. Defines the 2.4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming. By specifying the channels to search, roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels. Options are:
Full (all channels) 1,6,11 (the most commonly used channels) 1,7,13 (for ETSI and TELEC radios only) or Custom. Support for 5GHZ 802.11a channels where support for DFS is required. Options are: On, Off, Optimized. Not supported (always off) in some releases. ABG radio only. The amount of time the radio will passively scan each DFS channel to see if it will receive a beacon. Recommended value is 1.5 times that of the AP's beacon period. Use this parameter when the Radio Mode profile parameter is set to Ad Hoc. Specifies the channel to be used for an Ad Hoc connection to another cli-
ent device. If a channel is selected that is not supported by the by the ra-
dio, the default value is used. Options are:
1 through 14 (the 2.4GHz channels) 36, 40, 44, 48 (the UNII-1 channels) 6 - 11 Parameter Default Function When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens, the radio aggressively scans for available APs. Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning (set through Roam Trigger, Roam Delta and Roam Period). Aggressive scanning should be set to On unless there is significant co-channel interference due to over-
lapping APs on the same channel. Options are: On, Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features. Options are:
Full - Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features. The option known as On in previous versions. Optimized Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX fea-
tures except AP assisted roaming, AP specified maximum transmit pow-
er and radio management. Off - Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version number. Cisco IE = Cisco Information Element. Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions. Devices running Windows XP can change the default value. Devices run-
ning all other OS cannot change the default value. Specifies the type of authentication server. Options are: Type 1 (ACS server) and Type 2 (non-ACS server) Authentication method used within the secure tunnel created by EAP-
TTLS. Options are:
AUTO-EAP (Any available EAP method), MSCHAPV2, MSCHAP, PAP CHAP, EAP-MSCHAPV2 Type of Pairwise Master Key (PMK) caching to use when WPA2 is in use. PMK caching is designed to speed up roaming between APs by al-
lowing the client and the AP to cache the results of 802.1X authentica-
tions, eliminating the need to communicate with the ACS server. Standard PMK is used when there are no controllers. The reauthentica-
tion information is cached on the original AP. The client and the AP use the cached information to perform the four-way handshake to exchange keys. Opportunistic PMK (OPMK) is used when there are controllers. The reauthentication information cached on the controllers. The client and the controller behind the AP use the cached information to perform the four-way handshake to exchange keys. If the selected PMK caching method is not supported by the network in-
frastructure, every roam requires full 802.11X authentication, including interaction with the ACS server. If the active profile is using WPA2 CCKM, the global PMK Caching set-
ting is ignored and the client attempts to use CCKM. Options are: Standard, OPMK Default is Off and dimmed (cannot be changed). How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point. Options are: Main only, and On. How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Access Point. Option is: On-start on Main This parameter cannot be changed for some Summit radios. If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold, the packet is fragmented (sent as several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas where communica-
tion is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interference. Options are: Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes. Aggressive Scan On CCX or CCX Features Optimized WMM On Auth Server Type 1 TTLS Inner Method Auto-EAP PMK Caching Standard WAPI TX Diversity RX Diversity Off On On Start on Main Frag Thresh 2346 6 - 12 Parameter RTS Thresh Default 2347 LED Tray Icon Hide Password Off On On Admin Password SUMMIT
(or Blank) Auth Timeout 8 seconds Certs Path certificates Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout ms 5000 Ping Delay ms Logon Options 1000 SCU Function If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Re-
quest to Send (RTS) threshold, an RTS is sent before sending the pack-
et. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point. This parameter cannot be changed. The LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device. Options are: On, Off. Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray. Options are: On, Off The tray icon is not displayed when the Thor VM3 is running a Windows Embedded Standard 2009 operating system. When On, the Summit Config Utility masks passwords (characters on the screen are displayed as an *) as they are typed and when they are viewed. When Off, password characters are not masked. Options are: On, Off. A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped. If Hide Password is On, the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry dialog box. The password is case sensitive. This value is masked when the Admin is logged out. Options are: none. Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail. If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the association fails. No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed. If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the user is again prompted to enter the cre-
dentials. Options are: An integer from 3 to 60. A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where WPA Certificate Au-
thority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device when not using the Windows certificates store. Ensure the Windows folder path ex-
ists before assigning the path in this parameter. See Certificates (page 6-32) for instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates. This value is masked when the Admin is logged out. Options are: none. The complete path is C:\Program Files\Summit\certs Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping. Options are: 32 bytes, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 bytes. The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be continuously pinged. The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. The amount of time, in milliseconds, between each ping after a Start Ping button tap. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. Use SCU or Windows login credentials. Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes. If this panel is closed before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Logon Options There are two options available, a Single Signon (page 6-14) option which uses the Windows username and password as the credentials for 802.1x authentication and a Pre-Logon Connection (page 6-14) option which uses saved creden-
tials for 802.1x authentication before Windows logon. 6 - 13 If either option is enabled, the credentials entered here take precedence over any credentials entered on the profile tab. To use either option, select Logon Options from the Property list which activates the Logon Options button. Click the Logon Options button. Single Signon To use the Single Signon option, select the checkbox for Use the Windows username and password when available. When the active profile is using LEAP, PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC or EAP-FAST, the SCU ignores the username and password, if any, saved in the profile. Instead, the username and password used for Windows logon is used. Any certificates needed for authentication must still be specified in the profile. Click OK then click Commit. Pre-Logon Connection To use the Pre_logon connection, select the checkbox for Enable pre-logon connection. This option is designed to be used when:
EAP authentication is required for a WLAN connection
Single Signon is configured, so the Windows username and password are used as credentials for EAP authentication
The WLAN connection needs to be established before the Windows login. Once this option is enabled, the Authentication delay and Association timeout values can be adjusted as nec-
essary. Both values are specified in milliseconds (ms). The default authentication delay is 5000 ms and the valid range is 0 - 600,000 ms. The default association timeout is 10,000 ms and the valid range is 10,000 to 600,000 ms. Click on the Credentials button to enter the logon credentials. 6 - 14 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit Client Utility offers these choices:
The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this method is selected, anyone using the device can access the network.
The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign on screen is displayed. The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate.
When using Summit with the Thor VM3, there is an option on the Global tab to use the Windows user name and password to log on instead of any username and password stored in the profile. To Use Stored Credentials 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. 2. Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button. 3. Click the Commit button. 4. For LEAP and WPA/LEAP, configuration is complete. 5. For PEAP-MSCHAP and PEAP-GTC, importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional. 6. For EAP-TLS, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 7. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 8. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 9. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 10. If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning, input the PAC filename and password. 11. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 6 - 15 12. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters. 13. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. Note: See Configuring the Profile (page 6-18) for more details. Note:
If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials, the authentication will fail. No error message is displayed. The user may or may not be prompted to enter valid credentials. To Use Sign On Screen 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. Leave the Username and Password blank. No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or LEAP/WPA. 2. For PEAP-MSCHAP and PEAP-GTC, importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional. 3. For EAP-TLS, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 4. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 5. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 6. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 7. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 8. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed. 9. Enter the Username and Password. Click the OK button. 10. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. 11. The sign-on screen is displayed after a reboot. Note: See Configuring the Profile (page 6-18) for more details. If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK, the device associates but does not authenticate. The user is again prompted to enter credentials. If the user clicks the Cancel button, the device does not associate. The user is not prompted again for credentials until:
the device is rebooted, the radio is disabled then enabled, the Reconnect button on the is clicked or the profile is modified and the Commit button is clicked. To Use Windows Username and Password Please see Logon Options (page 6-13) for information. 6 - 16
Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
If using the Windows Certificate Store, the Windows Account must have a password. The password cannot be left blank. The Summit Client Utility uses the Windows user account credentials to access the Certificate Store. The Windows user account credentials need not be the same as the credentials entered in the Summit Client Utility. User Certificates EAP-TLS authentication requires a user certificate. The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store.
To generate the user certificate, see Generate a User Certificate (page 6-35).
To import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store, see Install a User Certificate (page 6-37).
A Root CA certificate is also needed. Refer to the section below. Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for EAP/TLS, PEAP/GTC and PEAP/MSCHAP. Two options are offered for storing these certificates. They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory. Certs Path 1. See Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a PC. 2. Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device. The default location for Certs Path is C:\Program Files\Summit\certs. A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable. 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert text box. 5. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. Windows Certificate Store 1. See Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a PC. 2. To import the certificate into the Windows store, See Install a Root CA Certificate (page 6-34). 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, be sure to check the Use MS store check-
box after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. The default is to use all certificates in the store. If this is OK, skip to the last step. 5. Otherwise, to select a specific certificate click on the Browse () button. 6 - 17 6. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 7. Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert text box. 8. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. Configuring the Profile Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network. The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions. Please see your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements. To begin the configuration process:
On the Main click the Admin Login button and enter the password. If using a single profile, edit the defa ult profile with the parameters for your network. Select the Default profile from the pull-
down menu.
Make any desired parameter changes as described in the appl icable following section determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the changes. IMPORTANT Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved. Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the tab in focus if there are unsaved changes. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit to save those changes first before making any additional changes. 6 - 18
No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to None 4. Set Auth Type to Open Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 19 WEP To connect using WEP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to WEP or Manual WEP (depending on SCU version) 4. Set Auth Type to Open Click the WEP keys/PSKs button. Valid keys are 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters (for 40-bit encryption) or 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters (for 128-bit encryption). Enter the key(s) and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 20 LEAP To use LEAP (without WPA, also called WEP-LEAP), make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to LEAP 3. Set Encryption to WEP EAP or Auto WEP (depending on SCU version) 4. Set Auth Type as follows:
5. 6. 7. If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open. If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared. If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 21 PEAP/MSCHAP To use PEAP/MSCHAP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the CA Cert ificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network.
For Stored Credentials, User, Password and t he CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab. See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on certificate storage. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. 6 - 22 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 23 PEAP/GTC To use PEAP/GTC, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to PEAP-GTC 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the CA Cert ificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab. See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on certificate storage. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. Note: Some servers may be configured to allow only a single use of the password for PEAP/GTC. In this case, wait for the token to update with a new password before attempting to validate the server. Then enter the new password, check the Validate Server checkbox and proceed with the certificate process below. 6 - 24 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/GTC for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 25 WPA/LEAP To use WPA/LEAP, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to LEAP 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type as follows:
5. 6. 7. If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open. If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared. If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP. To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Click OK then click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 26 EAP-FAST To use EAP-FAST, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. The SCU supports EAP-FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning. With automatic PAC provisioning, the user cre-
dentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the Thor VM3. For automatic PAC provisioning, once a username/password is authenticated, the PAC information is stored on the Thor VM3. The same username/password must be used to authenticate each time. See the note below for more details. For manual PAC provisioning, the PAC filename and Password must be entered. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials (stored or sign on) and the type of PAC pro-
visioning (automatic or manual). Click on the Credentials button. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials with auto-
matic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. To use Sign-On credentials:
Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Usernam e and Password when connecting to the network. To use Stored Credentials:
6 - 27
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Enter the password. To use Automatic PAC Provisioning:
No additional entries are required. To use manual PAC Provisioning:
Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password.
The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable. The PAC file must not be read only. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: When using Automatic PAC Provisioning, once authenticated, there is a file stored in the C:\Program Files\Summit\certs directory with the PAC credentials. If the username is changed, that file must be deleted. The filename is autoP.00.pac. 6 - 28 EAP-TLS To use EAP-TLS, make sure the following profile options are used. 1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to EAP-TLS 3. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4. Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type, select WPA CCKM, WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section. See Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials (page 6-15) for information on entering credentials. Click the Credentials button.
No entries except the User Ce rtificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name when connecting to the network.
For Stored Credentials, User Cert ificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Enter the Domain\Username (if the Domain is required), otherwise enter the Username. Select a user certificate from the Windows certificate store. Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certifi-
cate store. Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button. The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box. Some versions of the SCU require a User Cert password. If this entry field is present, enter the password for the user certif-
icate in the User Cert pwd box. If there are no user certificates in the Windows certificate store, follow these instructions for Generate a User Certificate
(page 6-35) and Install a User Certificate (page 6-37). See Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path (page 6-17) for more information on CA certificate storage. Check the Validate server checkbox. 6 - 29 If using the Windows certificate store:
1. Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. 2. To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. 3. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 4. Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. 5. Click OK then click Commit. If using the Certs Path option:
1. Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. 2. Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box. 3. Click OK then click Commit. The Thor VM3 should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP-TLS for the user authentication. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. See Certificates (page 6-32) for information on generating a Root CA certificate or a User certificate. Note: The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. 6 - 30 WPA PSK To connect using WPA/PSK, make sure the following profile options are used:
1. Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2. Set EAP Type to None 3. Set Encryption to WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 4. Set Auth Type to Open Click the WEP keys/PSKs button. This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value. Enter the key and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and restart. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. 6 - 31 Certificates Note: Please refer to the Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for communication. Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
!
If using the Windows Certificate Store, the Windows Account must have a password. The password cannot be left blank. The Summit Client Utility uses the Windows user account credentials to access the Certificate Store. The Windows user account credentials need not be the same as the entered in the Summit Client Utility. Quick Start Root Certificates are necessary for EAP-TLS, PEAP/GTC and PEAP/MSCHAP. 1. Generate a Root CA Certificate (page 6-32) either from the Thor VM3 or using a PC. 2. 3. If a PC was used to request the certificate, copy the certificate to the Thor VM3. Install a Root CA Certificate (page 6-34). User Certificates are necessary for EAP-TLS 1. Generate a User Certificate (page 6-35)either from the Thor VM3 or using a PC. 2. If a PC was used to request the certificate, copy the certificate to the Thor VM3. Install a User Certificate (page 6-37). 3. Generate a Root CA Certificate Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM3 and host computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC or the Thor VM3 to navigate to the Certificate Authority. To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to http://<CA IP address>/certsrv. Sign into the CA with any valid username and password. 6 - 32 Click the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL link. Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box. Click the DER button. To download the CA certificate, click on the Download CA certificate link. 6 - 33 Click the Save button and save the certificate. Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate. Next install the certificate on the Thor VM3. Install a Root CA Certificate Note: This section is only if the Windows certificate store is used. If the certificate store is not used, copy the certificate to the C:\Program Files\Summit\certs folder or other path specified in the Summit Certs global parameter. Copy the certificate file to theThor VM3. The certificate file has a .CER extension. Locate the file and double-tap on it. If presented with a security warning, confirm that you want to open the file. If the Certificate Wizard does not start automatically when you double-tap the certificate .CER file:
1. Select Start > Run and type certmgr.msc in the text box and tap OK (Windows Embedded Standard 2009 only). 2. In the left pane, right-click Trusted Root Certificate Authorities and select All Tasks > Import. 3. The Certificate Import Wizard starts. 4. Tap Next and use the Browse.. button to locate the Root certificate copied to the Thor VM3 then tap Open. 5. The certificate filename and path are displayed. Tap Next. Tap the Install Certificate button. The certificate import wizard starts. Tap Next. 6 - 34 Generate a User Certificate The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use the browser on the Thor VM3 or a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority. To request the user certificate, open a browser to http://<CA IP address>/certsrv. Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device. This process saves a user certificate file. There is no separate private key file as used on Windows CE devices. Click the Request a certificate link. Click on the User Certificate link. 6 - 35 Click on the Submit button. if there is a message box asking if you want to confirm the request, click Yes. The User Certificate is issued. Install the user certificate on the requesting computer by clicking the Install this certificate link. If the requesting computer is the Thor VM3, then the process is finished. otherwise, export the certificate as described below. Exporting a User Certificate Select Tools > Internet Options > Content and click the Certificates button. Make sure the Personal tab is selected. Highlight the certificate and click the Export button. The Certificate Export Wizard is started Select Yes, export the private key and click Next. 6 - 36 Uncheck Enable strong protection and check Next. The certifi-
cate type must be PKCS #12 (.PFX). When the private key is exported, you must enter the password, confirm the password and click Next. Be sure to remember the password as it is needed when installing the certificate. Supply the file name for the certificate. Use the Browse button to select the folder where you wish to store the certificate. The certif-
icate is saved with a .PFX extension. Click Finish. and OK to close the Successful Export message. Locate the User Certificate in the specified location. Copy to the Thor VM3. Install the User certificate. Install a User Certificate After generating and exporting the user certificate, install the user certificate. 1. Copy the certificate from the PC to the Thor VM3. 2. Locate the certificate file (it has a .PFX extension) and double-click on it. If clicking on the certificate file does not launch the certificate import wizard, follow the Manually Initiate Certificate Installation (page 6-38) before continuing the instructions below. 3. The certificate import wizard starts. Tap Next. 4. Confirm the certificate file name and location. 5. Tap Next. 6. You are prompted for the password that was assigned when the certificate was exported. 7. It is not necessary to select either of the checkboxes displayed above. 8. Enter the password and tap Next. 9. On the next screen, allow Windows to automatically select the certificate store, then click Next and Finish. An import successful message is displayed. 6 - 37 Manually Initiate Certificate Installation If the Certificate Wizard does not start automatically when you double-tap the certificate .PFX file:
1. Select Start > Run and type certmgr.msc in the text box and tap OK. 2. In the left pane, right-click Personal and select All Tasks > Import. 3. The Certificate Import Wizard starts. 4. Tap Next and use the Browse.. button to locate the User certificate copied to the Thor VM3. If necessary, change the file type drop down list at the bottom of the explorer window from *.cer to *.pfx. After selecting the .PFX file, tap Open. 5. The certificate filename and path are displayed. Tap Next. 6. Return to the installation instructions above. 6 - 38 OneClick Internet This section contains the User Manual for the customized version of WebToGo's OneClick Internet for the Honeywell Thor VM3. OneClick Internet is installed by Honeywell on all Thor VM3s equipped with a WWAN radio. Available carriers and OneClick fea-
tures may vary by device. OneClick Internet provides:
Internet connection management
Email download
SMS Management
Contact management for SIM and Microsoft Outlook
GPS Management Since WebToGo OneClick Internet is preinstalled, it is present on the Windows Start Menu. A desktop icon is also provided.
!
Honeywell does not recommend using standby on the Thor VM3 while the WWAN connection is active. When exiting standby, a delay of one minute or more may occur as the WWAN radio reads firmware files and initializes before recon-
necting. If this delay is acceptable to the user, standby may be enabled. When the One Click Internet utility is displayed on screen and the Thor VM3 enters standby, the touch screen may remain inactive for 10-15 seconds after the Thor VM3 resumes from standby. Preparing for Initial Use on the Thor VM3 Install SIM Card If using a CDMA carrier such as Verizon, skip this step because a SIM card is not used. Install SIM Card (page 4-57) in the Thor VM3. Load Firmware While the OneClick Internet utility is preinstalled, it is necessary to load the GOBI radio firmware for your selected car-
rier such as AT&T, T-Mobile or Verizon. Note: For carriers requiring a SIM card, the firmware may automatically be selected when a SIM card is installed in the Thor VM3. Double-tap the OneClick Internet icon on the Thor VM3 desktop. Tap the Settings button and select the Firmware tab. Select the firmware for your carrier from the list and tap Change. For more details, see OneClick Internet Connection Manager (page 6-56) and the Firmware (page 6-48) tab. Activation This step is only necessary for Verizon. You need the IMEI number for the Thor VM3 when you contact Verizon prior to activating service on the Thor VM3. The IMEI number can be found on the Info (page 6-48) tab. The activation screen is displayed automatically after the Verizon firmware is selected. If the activation screen is not automatically displayed, double-tap the OneClick Internet icon on the desktop. Select Settings > General tab and tap the Activate button. 6 - 39
Make sure Automated Activation is selected and tap Next. Tap Next to complete the activation. Once the activation is completed, OneClick Internet may be minimized to the tray. To verify your settings, tap on the OneClick Internet icon in the system tray. Tap Settings. Tap the Network tab. 6 - 40 This screen contains the settings including the telephone number from the provider, in this case Verizon. Using OneClick Internet If OneClick Internet is not loaded, double-tap the desktop icon to load it. If OneClick Internet is loaded but minimized to the system tray, tap the OneClick Internet icon in the system tray to maximize it. Connection Management 1. Launch the OneClick Internet Connection Manager and wait until the status icon is blue indicating ready. 2. If there is a problem, verify the SIM card is installed (AT&T, T-Mobile only), the proper firmware has been loaded, etc. 3. If PIN security is used, a popup window prompts for the SIM PIN. 4. Create a connection profile on the Settings menu. 5. Tap the Connect button. The signal strength is indicated as well as the name of the mobile network you are using and the status of the WWAN device. Tap the Disconnect button to end the session. 6 - 41 Menu Buttons Radio Button The Radio button allows you to switch the WWAN radio on and off to save power or to disable the radio in instances where it is not desired (such as during airplane travel). When the radio is switched off, the button is red. When on, it is green. If the radio is disabled by a hardware switch or if the device is not available, the button is disabled and is light gray/white. Statistics Button The Statistics area provides advanced information about the connection. Values displayed are approximate. Tap the Statistics button to enable the statistics viewing area, which is below the main area. When the statistics are displayed, tapping the Statistics button again hides the statistics viewing area. Data In:
Data Out:
Total:
Speed:
Max. Speed:
Time:
The amount of data received during the current connection. The amount of data sent during the current connection. The total amount of data transferred during the current connection. The current data transfer rate. The maximum data transfer rate during this connection. The duration of the current connection. Update Button OneClick Internet provides a built-in online update functionality that allows for an automatic update of OneClick Internet application, device drivers, and APN database. Honeywell DOES NOT recommend using this option. Contact Technical Assistance (page 9-1) or information on upgrading to another version of OneClick Internet. The update is triggered by pressing the update button. The application will check the WebToGo server, if updates are available, and offer them for download if suitable. In order to start the update, select a file from the list of available updates and tap OK. Help Button OneClick Internet includes online help that can be accessed by tapping the Help button. 6 - 42 Settings Button Access the Settings menu by tapping the Settings button on the main window. The following tabs are available:
Profile
Network
History
PIN Info
Firmware
General Profile Create a connection profile to store connection information. Once a profile has been created, its name appears in the drop down Profiles list, which replaces the Profile Name text box in the illustration above. 6 - 43
Buttons Button Description Create a new profile. When this option is selected, the Profile Name is a text box. Enter a name for the profile as well as other connection specific configuration. When finished, tap the Save button to save the new profile. Edit a current profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to edit the profile parameters. When finished, tap the Save button to save the profile changes. Delete a profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to delete the profile Save a profile. Save a new profile or save changes made when editing a profile. Set Profile. Select a profile from the Profiles list and tap this button to make it the active profile used for connection. Parameters Label Profile Name APN Username Password DNS Proxy Set-
tings Description Profile name - Assign a unique name for each profile. Access Point Name of the network operator. Contact your network operator for more informa-
tion When you are using a CDMA network, the APN field does not appear. Username. Contact your network operator for more information Password. Contact your network operator for more information Domain Name Server. Contact your network operator for more information. When Use Automatic DNS-settings is selected, no additional DNS entries are required. Oth-
erwise, enter the DNS addresses. Proxy Settings for your network. Contact your network operator for more information. When Use Proxy Server is selected, no additional proxy entries are required. Otherwise, enter the Proxy and the Port. 6 - 44 Network The appearance of the network tab depends on the type of firmware selected. Network with SIM Card Select Connection Label Select automatically Use GPRS/EDGE only Use UMTS/HSPA only Description Selects the best suited network automatically Use only GPRS/EDGE for a connection Use only UMTS/HSPA for a connection. Select and tap Apply. A Network changed successfully message is displayed. Close the tab and view the signal strength icon in the main window. Once the signal strength is displayed, you can establish a connection. Select Network Use this option to select from available networks. Note: When you are registered to a CDMA network, you cannot select the network. All CDMA network is shown instead. Note: The network list only appears if the connection setting is Only use GPRS or Only use UMTS/
HSPA. Select the network and tap on the register button. If the change is successful you will see the message Network changed successfully. This item is useful when traveling . Automatic mode selects the preferred network of your network opera-
tor. If enabled, Network Selection displays a list of network options. 1. Automatic Selection 2. Retrieving Networks.. The currently registered network is marked. 6 - 45 CDMA Network Information on the CDMA network is displayed. There are no editable parameters on this screen. History The history shows the data volume transferred in a specified time frame. Select the From and To dates to see the data volume sent/received in the specified period. Tap Reset to reset the counter. 6 - 46 PIN You can Activate/Deactivate the PIN or Change the PIN. Activate/Deactivate PIN This tab is only displayed when a firmware is loaded that requires a SIM card (such as AT&T or T-Mobile). By default, you have to enter the PIN each time you start WebToGo OneClick Internet using a modem card. Deactivate the PIN to avoid entering the PIN each time. Change PIN This dialog lets you change your PIN. Label Current PIN New PIN Verify PIN Description Enter the current PIN. Enter the new PIN. Verify the new PIN by entering it again. 6 - 47 Info This tab displays SIM card, modem and system Information. Firmware OneClick Internet selects the correct Firmware matching your operator automatically, if a special firmware for your operator is available and a SIM card is inserted. If no specific firmware for your operator is available, generic firm-
ware is selected. After a firmware has been selected, it appears as the Current Profile. 6 - 48 You can manually load your desired firmware. Select a new firmware manually by clicking the Select New Profile dropdown menu, selecting a firmware from the menu and tapping the Change button to load. To return to auto-
matic firmware selection, choose Automatic(UMTS) in the dropdown menu. Note: Switching between CDMA and UMTS firmware is not done automatically. You must select CDMA firmware manually to connect to CDMA networks. If you want to return to UMTS networks, you must manually select UMTS firmware. Activation on CDMA When CDMA Firmware is selected, the activation of the modem on the CDMA network starts automatically. During the process of loading CDMA firmware, an activation window pop up allowing a choice between Man-
ual Activation and Automated Activation. Label Manual Activation Automatic Activation Description Enter the requested items as direct by a representative from your carrier. Use your modem to start an automated activation session If you cancel the activation or if it fails, you can also start the activation manually by pressing the Activate but-
ton on the General tab. General Label Auto Launch Connect Automati-
cally Reconnect Auto-
matically Allow roaming Roaming Alert Description When selected OneClick Internet launches automatically when the user starts the Thor VM3 and logs in. When selected OneClick Internet automatically connects on start-up. When selected OneClick Internet reconnects automatically when the Thor VM3 returns from standby or hibernate. When selected OneClick Internet allows connections in foreign networks. Use care when enabling roaming to avoid roaming charges. When selected OneClick Internet displays an alert when roaming. 6 - 49 Label Description Gobi NDIS Auto Connect Application When selected OneClick Internet connects automatically after powering up the operating system and before the user logs in. Use the Application tab to specify any application to launch automatically once the Internet connection is estab-
lished. Use the Browse button to locate the desired application. Application Buttons SMS 6 - 50 The SMS Center window is split into menu bar, folder view, folder content and preview window. To manage your short messages you may:
Button Description Manage SMS folders Change SMS settings Create new SMS/MMS messages Reply to SMS Forward SMS Move SMS to a folder Delete SMS Send and receive SMS/MMS (if supported) Manage phone book contacts on SIM and in Email client. Folder By using this menu, you may change the folder structure of the SMS Center:
6 - 51 Button New Folder Rename Remove Description Creates a new folder, name has to be unique Renames an existing folder Removes an existing folder (including the messages) Note: Predefined folders can't be deleted or modified. Settings The settings window lets you change the deletion mode. You may choose whether to delete an SMS from the SMS Center, from the SIM or decide whether this should be asked at all. You may also activate an alarm signal when a new SMS arrives. New SMS The New Message window is used to enter the SMS text. You may also enter texts by copy & paste from other applications. The status bar at the lower right corner indicates the length of the SMS for your convenience: the first number tells you how many parts the SMS consists of (one part has max. 160 characters/unicode70), the second number counts down from 160/70 characters. The number in parenthesis () counts the total number of characters. The recipient for your SMS has to be entered in the To field. This can be either entered by typing digits or by clicking the To button to select a recipient from the address book. Recipient addresses may be taken from the SIM address book or from your Email client's contact folder. Just select an address and click OK. To send the mes-
sage click Send/Receive. Reply Highlight a message to which you want to reply, e.g. in the inbox folder, then click the Reply button. The New Message window opens and the recipient address is already filled in the To field. Continue as before when sending a new message. Forward Highlight a SMS, which you want to forward. Click the Forward button. The New Message window opens, how-
ever the message text is already copied. Continue as before when sending a new message. Move SMS.. Highlight the SMS to be moved and click the Move SMS button. A small window opens that lets you select the destination folder. Select the folder to which the message should be moved, then click Move. Delete Highlight the SMS which you want to delete. Click Delete to remove the message. Send/Receive Messages will be sent and/or received by clicking on this button. 6 - 52 Addresses Clicking this button opens the address book. You may add new contacts to your personal address book or you may change existing addresses, delete addresses or exchange them with your SIM card and your Email client applica-
tion, or export the data set. Buttons Description New Contact Modify Delete Copy Export Create new contact. Modify a contact. Delete contacts, mark one or more and press the button. Synchronization with MS Outlook. To export addresses you may select between two export formats:
CSV (comma separated text format, usua lly read by spread sheet applications)
VCard (business card format, used by MS Outlook and other applications) Web Browser Clicking this button opens the Web Browser and allows the user to surf the Internet once the connection is established. The default browser is used, which is Internet Explorer by default on the Thor VM3. Email Clicking this button opens the Email application after the connection is established. The Email application is the default Email client set in the Control Panel (Start > Control Panel > Internet Options > Programs tab). GPS Tap the GPS button to open the GPS window. Press Get GPS to start the GPS. The rotating GPS button indicates the GPS is active. 6 - 53 After Latitude and Longitude Data are displayed, the user can tap Track Me to open Google Maps, showing their cur-
rent location on a map. Lat - Latitude - The location north or south of the equator in degrees. Lon - Longitude: The angular distance from the Prime Meridian in degrees. After Latitude and Longitude Data are displayed, the user can tap Clipboard and the latitude and longitude are copied to the clipboard cache. The data can be pasted into an email, document or other electronic media. About OneClick Internet allows the user to configure the WWAN connection by entering basic setup information. The network connection (service carrier) can be chosen based on the firmware loaded, GPS tracking can be enabled and SMS messaging can be configured. Once configured, OneClick Internet allows the user to connect or disconnect from the mobile network. System Requirements OneClick Internet requires:
Gobi 000 3G Module (preinstalled by Honeywell)
Gobi 000 Driver package (loaded by Honeywell) OneClick Internet for Gobi 000is compatible with the following operating system on the Thor VM3:
Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Supported Languages OneClick Internet supports the following languages:
German, English, Spanish, French, Polish, Russian, Italian, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese. Note: This does not mean that the Thor VM3 has been localized for these languages. Installing or Upgrading OneClick Internet Note: You must use the Honeywell supplied version of OneClick Internet. Do not change versions unless instructed by your Honeywell representative. One Click Internet is pre-installed before the Thor VM3 is shipped. If you have an installed version of OneClick Internet and need to update to a newer version, you must uninstall the previous version first by selecting Start > Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs. Select OneClick Internet and tap Remove. Follow the on screen instructions. Note: OneClick Internet does not install the drivers for the Gobi 000 devices. Device drivers are preloaded. Installation When you double-click the Installer file for OneClick Internet, it extracts the files to install. 6 - 54 Next, select the application language. By default, the language of the OS is used (if available). Review and accept the license agreement. Click Accept, if you agree. Otherwise please click Reject to cancel installation. Next the installer asks for the installation directory. Use the Browse button to specify a location other than the default. 6 - 55 Installation process is indicated on screen. When completed. click the Finish button to exit the installer. Start OneClick Internet from the Windows Program Menu or double-tap the desktop icon. OneClick Internet Connection Manager Launch OneClick Internet from the desktop icon or Windows Start Menu. When OneClick Internet is active, a status icon appears in the system tray. 6 - 56 The main screen for OneClick Internet opens when the application is started. This screen displays basic information on the connection as well as access to more advanced features and details. From this screen you can connect to the Internet, send Emails, send short messages (SMS) and access the GPS. General Windows controls for minimize and exit are located at the upper right of the screen. Connection Management Refer to the table below for descriptions of the items in the connection management area. Icon Description Network signal strength Additionally the network name is displayed to the right of the icon. The more green bars, the stronger the signal. Connect / Cancel / Disconnect Tap this button to connect or disconnect. The color of this button also indicates the status of the connection:
The radio is disconnected. Tap the button to connect. The radio is currently connecting. The radio is connected. Tap the button to disconnect. SMS The SMS button is enabled if no Internet connection is active. When this button is active, tapping it ac-
cesses the integrated SMS application. Web Tap this button to launch the default browser. Email Tap this button to launch the default Email application. GPS Tap this button access the integrated GPS tool. 6 - 57 Information Buttons Icon Description Radio On/Off Tap this button to switch the radio state. The color of this button also indicates the state of the radio:
The radio is On. Tap the button to turn the radio Off. The radio is Off. Tap the button to turn the radio On. The radio is Connecting or the radio has been disabled. The button is inactive at this time. Statistics Show/Hide Tap the button to expand the screen to include connection statistics. See Statistics Button (page 6-
42) for details. Tap the button to hide the connection statistics. Settings Tap this button to access One Clink Internet settings. Select from several tabs to configure the connection settings. See Settings Button (page 6-43) for details. Update Tap this button to access OneClick Internet update tab. See Update Button (page 6-42). Help Click this button to view the online help. Ready. Tap the Connect button to establish a connection. Status Connecting. Tap the Cancel button to cancel the connection in process. Connected. Tap the Disconnect button to end the connection. Failure. Review the screen for messages such as No Network, etc. 6 - 58 7 Key Maps Integrated Keypad P1 P8 P2 P9 P3 P10 P4 P11 P5 P12 P6 P13 P7 P14 There are seven integrated programmable keys located on the Thor VM3 below the display. Each programmable key can be modified by the Orange key for a total of 14 programmable keys. See Programmable Key (page 5-41) to remap these keys. The default values for these keys are:
To get this Programmable Key Press These Keys in this Order Default Key Value F1 F2 F3 Open/Close Soft Keyboard Enter
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
<none>
P1 (Programmable key 1) P2 (Programmable key 2) P3 (Programmable key 3) P4 (Programmable key 4) P5 (Programmable key 5) P6 (Programmable key 6) P7 (Programmable key 7) P8 (Programmable key 8) P9 (Programmable key 9) P10 (Programmable key 10) P10 (Programmable key 11) P10 (Programmable key 12) P10 (Programmable key 13) P10 (Programmable key 14) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 The following key press sequences are not programmable:
To get this function Press These Keys in this Order Increase speaker volume Decrease speaker volume Increase display brightness Decrease display brightness Blue Blue Blue Blue P1 P2 P5 P6 The Blue plus P3, P4 or P7 key press sequences cause no action. 7 - 1 External 21-Key Keyboard The table below shows the results of the keypress combinations. Each key has an unshifted mode, a Yellow shifted mode and a Green shifted mode.
To enter Yellow shifted mode, press the Yellow key. The keypad remains in Yellow shifted mode until any other key is pressed or the Yellow key is pressed again.
To enter Green shifted mode, press the Green key. The keypad remains in Green shifted mode until any other key is pressed or the Green key is pressed again.
Pressing the Yellow key then the Green key cancels Yellow mode and the keypad is in Green shifted mode.
Pressing the Green key then the Yellow key cancels Green mode and the keypad is in Yellow shifted mode.
Arrow keys are unaffected by Yellow or Green shifted mode.
Keypress combinations marked as N/A do nothing.
Pressing the backlight key (alone or after the Green or Yellow keys) cycles the keypad backlight through Low, Medium, High, Off then repeats. To get this Key Press These Keys in this Order 0 - 91 Yellow Green PF Yellow Del Yellow Tab Yellow Orange Orange Orange Orange 1 - 0 1 - 0 PF Del Tab P3 P4 P5 P6 0 - 9 F1 - F10 F11 - F20 P15 P16 Delete Backspace Tab Backtab 7 - 2 External 95-Key Keyboard Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Screen SysRq Scroll Lock Pause Break
!
1
~
`
Tab Caps Lock Shift Ctrl
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
) 0 Q A W S E D R F T Y G H U J I K O L C V B N M
<
, Z X Alt _
-
+
=
BackSpace
{
[
"
'
?
/
P
:
;
>
. Alt
}
]
|
\
Enter Shift Ctrl
/
8 5 2 Num Lock 7 Home 4 1 End 0 Ins Fn
-
+
*
9 PgUp 6 3 PgDn
. Del Enter L R These key functions apply to both the 95-Key USB Keyboard (page 3-18) and the 95-key PS/2 Keyboard (page 3-19). The key map table that follows lists the commands used for the Thor VM3. Note that since the Thor VM3 uses a Microsoft Win-
dows operating system, no DOS Terminal Emulation keypress sequences are provided. There are 10 hidden keys on the 95 key keyboard. Each of the hidden keys is accessed by pressing the <Fn> key (located in the top right hand corner) plus a key on the numeric keypad on the right. Additional function keys are supported as well. To get this Key / Function Press These Keys in this Order Insert Home Page Up Delete End Page Down Up Arrow Left Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN 0 (numeric keypad) 7 (numeric keypad) 9 (numeric keypad)
. (numeric keypad) 1 (numeric keypad) 3 (numeric keypad) 8 (numeric keypad) 4 (numeric keypad) 2 (numeric keypad) 6 (numeric keypad) 7 - 3 External 60-Key Keyboard ESC 2ND CAPS BREAK F1 F2 R/S F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 CAPS BKLT F10 CTRL SHIFT
!
|
Q A ALT SP
@
W
# E
\
S Z
: D X
$
;
R F C
^
%
T
" G '
Y H
&
U J V
~
B N
*
. _ I K M
(
O
?
L
) P INS BKSP 2nd PgUp ENTER Home PgDn END
/
=
[
<
7 4 1 0
+
}
>
9 6 3 8 5
-
{
]
2
. DEL The key map table that follows lists the commands used when using the Thor VM3 with the 60-key PS/2 Keyboard (page 3-20). The 60-key keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator or key. NumLock can be toggled On or Off using the 2nd SHIFT F10 keypress sequence. The default for NumLock is On. Changes made to the NumLock status persist across a Windows restart. When running RFTerm, please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences. 60 Key KeyMap 101-Key Equivalencies
The following keymap is used on an Thor VM3 that is NOT running RFTerm. When running RFTerm an optional IBM 3270 Keypad Overlay (page 7-9) or IBM 5250 Keypad Overlay (page 7-9) is available.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the key sequence.
When the Thor VM3 boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be toggled with a 2nd + F1 key sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On. The keymaps below assume Caps is Off.
The Thor VM3 keyboard has several control keys. The following control keys are not used:
The 2nd function of the F3 key is not used as Windows Power Management controls all power management modes on the Thor VM3. The 2nd functions of the F4 and F5 keys are not used as the display brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the front of the Thor VM3. The 2nd functions of the F6 and F7 keys are not used as the Thor VM3 has TFT LCD screen with no provision for contrast adjustments. The 2nd functions of the F8 and F9 keys are not used as the sound volume on the Thor VM3 is controlled with a Microsoft Windows Control Panel. The 2nd function of the F10 key is not used as the display backlight timer also controls the keyboard backlight. To get this Key / Function Power On/Off 2nd Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Space Enter Enter (numeric) CapsLock (Toggle) Back Space Tab Back Tab Ctrl-Break Pause Press These Keys in this Order Power 2nd Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Sp Enter 2nd 2nd BkSp Tab 2nd F2 Ctrl 2nd Enter F1 Tab 2nd F2 7 - 4 Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Insert Delete (numeric) Home End Page Up Page Down ScrollLock F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 2nd 2nd A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S Bksp DOT Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Shift Shift Shift F10 F1 F2 7 - 5 t u v w x y z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 - 6 T U V W X Y Z Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift Shift 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 DOT
<
[
]
>
=
{
}
/ (numeric)
/ (alpha)
- (numeric)
- (alpha)
+ (numeric)
+ (alpha)
* (numeric)
* (alpha)
: (colon)
; (semicolon)
?
`
_ (underscore)
, (comma)
' (apostrophe)
~ (tilde)
\
|
"
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
(
) 0 DOT 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ctrl 7 Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 I (letter i) Ctrl D F L N M J H B S A G Q W E R T Y U O P 7 8 9 I (letter i) 7 - 7 7 - 8 8 Specifications and Reference Material Technical Specifications Thor VM3 Processor Memory Memory Mass Storage Mass Storage Storage Expansion Operating System Operating System Radio Modules Scanner Options Display Technology Keyboard Touch Screen External Connectors Beeper Power Supply Uninterruptible Power Supply Backup Battery (RCT) Intel Atom Dual Core CPU operating at 1.46GHz 1 GB DDR3 RAM 2 or 4 GB DDR3 RAM 16, 32 or 64 GB mSATA (Window Embedded Standard 7) 32 or 64 GB mSATA (Window 7 Professional) 32 or 64 GB mSATA 4 GB or larger mSATA Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional No operating system Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard 7 (32-bit) Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (64-bit) No operating system 802.11 a/b/g/n radio / Bluetooth Optional GPS / WWAN No integrated scanner, Optional serial, USB or Bluetooth scanners Intel GMA 500 graphics processor, XGA compatible Active matrix TFT Resolution: 1024 x 468 pixels 400 NIT (indoor) or 900 NIT (outdoor) brightness 12.1 (measured horizontally) display Transmissive with LED backlight Automatic brightness control on outdoor display Vehicle motion screen blanking available Integrated 7-key keypad Optional 95-key USB keyboard Optional numeric-only keyboard Impact resistive, standard hardened or premium Signature capture capability Optional defroster Field replaceable front panel including standard or premium touch screen and optional defroster Optional external 802.11 / GPS / WWAN antenna connectors Additional connectors on Quick Mount Smart Dock, see below Minimum loudness greater than 95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit 10 to 60 VDC isolated Internal UPS battery, 30-minute life at -20C (-4F) Internal lithium battery maintains Real Time Clock 8 - 1 Quick Mount Smart Dock Power Connector COM1Connector COM2 Connector CANBUS/AUDIO Connector USB Connector Power Switch External Power Supply Input Power 6-pin connector:
Direct10-60V DC input power Optional external converters for AC (90-240 VAC) and extended range DC (60-150 VDC) 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM1 with switchable power on pin 9 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM2 with switchable power on pin 9 15-pin male, CANbus/Audio connector supports either audio/microphone via adapter cable or J1939 Female and J1939 Male connectors via CANbus cable 9-pin female, USB connector supports USB host port via adapter cable Sealed power switch AC Adapter, 120-240VAC to 12VDC DC Input Voltage: 10- 60 VDC, Input Current: 4.6 Amps Input Fuse: 8A Time Delay. Replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP
Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R
Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Power Connector 6-pin connector:
Direct10-60V DC input power Optional external converters for AC (90-240 VAC) and extended range DC (60-150 VDC) 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM1 with switchable power on pin 9 9-pin male, RS-232 serial port, COM2 with switchable power on pin 9 15-pin male, CANbus/Audio connector supports either audio/microphone via adapter cable or J1939 Female and J1939 Male connectors via CANbus cable 9-pin female, USB connector supports USB host port via adapter cable 15-pin female, USB connector supports 2 USB host ports via adapter cable One USB Host connector behind waterproof cap One RJ45 Ethernet connector behind waterproof cap Sealed power switch AC Adapter, 120-240VAC to 12VDC DC Input Voltage: 10- 60 VDC, Input Current: 4.6 Amps Input Fuse: 8A Time Delay. Replace with same size, rating and type of fuse:
Littelfuse 0215008.MXP
Cooper Bussmann BK1/S506-8-R
Bel Fuse 5HT 8-R or equivalent. COM1Connector COM2 Connector CANBUS/AUDIO Connector USB1 Connector USB 2 Connector USB Host Connector Ethernet Connector Power Switch External Power Supply Input Power 8 - 2 Dimensions Thor VM3 Width Height Depth Weight 12.6 (31.9 cm) 10.3 (26.1 cm) 2.4 (6.2 cm) 6.75 lb. (3.1 kg)??
Quick Mount Smart Dock Note: The RAM ball is not included in the following measurements. Length Width Height Weight 7.1 (18.0 cm) 6.1 (15.5 cm) 2.5 (6.4 cm), measurement includes strain relief cable clamps 3.2 lb. (1.5 kg) 8 - 3 Environmental Specifications Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock Operating Temperature Storage Temperature ESD Operating Humidity Water and Dust ESD Vibration Crash
-22 to 122 F (-30C to 50C) [non-condensing]
-22F to 140F (-30C to 60C) [non-condensing]
8 KV air, 4kV direct contact Up to 95% non-condensing ??
IEC 60529 compliant to IP66 15 kV MIL-STD-810F, composite wheeled vehicles. SAE-J 1455 Network Card Specifications
?? 802.11a/b/g/n Bus Interface Wireless Frequencies
(varies by regulatory domain) RF Data Rates RF Power Level Channels Connectivity Diversity Bluetooth Bus Interface Enhanced Data Rate Connection Bluetooth Version Operating Frequency QDID WWAN SDIO (Secure Digital I/O) 2.4 to 2.4895 GHz IEEE 802.11b / 802.11g DSSS OFDM 5.15 to 5.82 GHz IEEE 802.11a DSSS OFDM 802.11a (OFDM) 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps 802.11b (DSSS) 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps 802.11g (OFDM) 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps 802.11n (OFDM 20 MHz chs) 13, 26, 39, 52, 78, 104, 117, 130 Mbps 802.11n (OFDM 40 MHz chs) 27, 54, 81, 108, 162, 216, 243, 270 Mbps 50 mW max. FCC: 1-11, 36, 40 ,44, 48, 149, 153, 157, 161 ETSI: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 ,48 TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI Yes USB Up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air No less than 32.80 feet (10 meters) line of sight 2.0 + EDR 2.402 - 2.480 GHz B013455 8 - 4 Port and Connector Pinouts Power Supply Connector 4 3 2 5 6 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal V In+
V In+
V In-
V In-
GND Ignition Description 10-60V DC input +
10-60V DC input +
input -
input -
Chassis ground
+0V to 60V to start terminal PIN 1 PIN 5 COM1 and COM2 Connector Signal Pin DCD 1 RXD 2 TXD 3 DTR 4 GND 5 DSR 6 RTS 7 CTS 8 9
+5VDC Shell CGND PIN 9 PIN 6 Description Data Carrier Detect Input Receive Data Input Transmit Data Output Data Terminal Ready Output Signal/Power Ground Data Set Ready Input Request to Send Output Clear to Send Input Bar Code Scanner Power - 500mA max Chassis Ground 8 - 5 USB Connector PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 9 PIN 6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal GND USBC_D+
USBC_D-
USB_H1_PWR GND GND USB_H1_D+
USB_H1_D-
USBC_VBUS Description Common ground USB client data signal USB client data signal USB host 1; 5V output power Common ground Common ground USB host 1 data signal USB host 1 data signal USB client 5V detect from attached host USB Y Cable D9 Male Connector PIN 1 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 9 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND USBC_D+
USBC_D-
USB_H1_PWR GND GND USB_H1_D+
USB_H1_D-
USBC_VBUS Common ground USB client data signal USB client data signal USB host 5V output power Common ground Common ground USB host 1 data signal USB host 1 data signal USB client 5V detect from attached host USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H1_D-
USB_H1_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground USB Client Connector The USB client connection is not supported on the Thor VM3. 8 - 6 USB Connector2 PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used USB_H2_PWR USB_H2_D+
USB_H2_D-
GND GND USB_H3_PWR USB_H3_D+
USB_H3_D-
GND GND Description USB host 2 5V output power USB host 2 data signal USB host 2 data signal Common ground Common ground USB host 3 5V output power USB host 3 data signal USB host 3 data signal Common ground Common ground 8 - 7 USB Y Cable D15 Male Connector PIN 1 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 15 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used USB_H2_PWR USB_H2_D+
USB_H2_D-
GND GND USB_H3_PWR USB_H3_D+
USB_H3_D-
GND GND USB host 2 5V output power USB host 2 data signal USB host 2 data signal Common ground Common ground USB host 3 5V output power USB host 3 data signal USB host 3 data signal Common ground Common ground USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H2_D-
USB_H2_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground USB Host Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 4 PIN 1 5V_USB USB_H3_D-
USB_H3_D+
GND 1 2 3 4 Shell CGND USB Power, Current Limited USB D-
USB D+
USB Power Return Chassis Ground 8 - 8 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 11 PIN 15 PIN 10 CANbus / Audio Connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Headset Adapter Cable Signal Name
-
CAN_L CAN_GND
-
GND Audio return Audio output Mic input Mic return Audio Return GND CAN_SHLD CAN_H
-
CAN_V+
Description CAN reserved CAN_L bus line dominant low CAN Ground CAN reserved Optional ground Headset return Headset output Microphone input Microphone return Optional ground CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN reserved Option CAN external Power Supply D15 Female Connector PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Audio return Audio output Mic input Mic return Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Headset return Headset output Microphone input Microphone return Quick Connect Headset Connector PIN 4 PIN 1 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 Mic input Mic return Audio output Audio return Microphone input Microphone return Headset output Headset return 8 - 9 CANbus Y Cable D15 Female Connector PIN 10 PIN 5 PIN 1 PIN 6 PIN 15 PIN 11 Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Not Used CAN_L CAN_GND Not Used GND Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used GND CAN_SHLD CAN_H Not Used CAN_V+
CAN_L bus line dominant low CAN ground CAN reserved Ground Optional ground CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN reserved CAN external power supply 9-Pin J1939 (Deutsch) Connectors Pin Signal Description Receptacle-
J1939 Female 3 4 Socket J1939 Mail 5 5 4 2 9 8 6 6 1 7 7 9 8 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CAN_GND CAN_V+
CAN_H CAN_L CAN_SHLD Not used Not used Not used Not used CAN Ground Option CAN external Power Supply CAN_H bus line dominant high CAN_L bus line dominant low 8 - 10 Hat Encoding 8 - 11 8 - 12 9 Customer Support Product Service and Repair Honeywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world. To obtain war-
ranty or non-warranty service, please visit www.honeywellaidc.com and select Support > Contact Service and Repair to see your regions instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA #). You should do this prior to return-
ing the product. Technical Assistance If you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device, please contact us by using one of the methods below:
Knowledge Base: www.hsmknowledgebase.com Our Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions. If the Knowledge Base cannot help, our Technical Support Portal (see below) provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question. Technical Support Portal: www.hsmsupportportal.com The Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem, but it also provides immediate solutions to your techni-
cal issues by searching our Knowledge Base. With the Portal, you can submit and track your questions online and send and receive attachments. Web form: www.hsmcontactsupport.com You can contact our technical support team directly by filling out our online support form. Enter your contact details and the description of the question/problem. Telephone: www.honeywellaidc.com/locations For our latest contact information, please check our website at the link above. Limited Warranty Honeywell International Inc. (HII) warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and to conform to HIIs published specifications applicable to the products purchased at the time of shipment. This warranty does not cover any HII product which is (i) improperly installed or used; (ii) damaged by accident or negligence, including failure to follow the proper maintenance, service, and cleaning schedule; or (iii) damaged as a result of (A) modification or alteration by the purchaser or other party, (B) excessive voltage or current supplied to or drawn from the interface connections, (C) static electricity or electro-
static discharge, (D) operation under conditions beyond the specified operating parameters, or (E) repair or service of the prod-
uct by anyone other than HII or its authorized representatives. This warranty shall extend from the time of shipment for the duration published by HII for the product at the time of purchase
(Warranty Period). Any defective product must be returned (at purchasers expense) during the Warranty Period to HII factory or authorized service center for inspection. No product will be accepted by HII without a Return Materials Authorization, which may be obtained by contacting HII. In the event that the product is returned to HII or its authorized service center within the Warranty Period and HII determines to its satisfaction that the product is defective due to defects in materials or workmanship, HII, at its sole option, will either repair or replace the product without charge, except for return shipping to HII. EXCEPT AS MAY BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER COVENANTS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. HIIS RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASERS EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT WITH NEW OR REFURBISHED PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL HII BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL ANY LIABILITY OF HII ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT SOLD HEREUNDER (WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM A CLAIM BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO HII FOR THE PRODUCT. THESE LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT EVEN WHEN HII MAY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INJURIES, LOSSES, OR DAMAGES. SOME STATES, PROVINCES, OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 9 - 1 All provisions of this Limited Warranty are separate and severable, which means that if any provision is held invalid and unen-
forceable, such determination shall not affect the validity of enforceability of the other provisions hereof. Use of any peripherals not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by this warranty. This includes but is not limited to: cables, power supplies, cradles, and docking stations. HII extends these warranties only to the first end-users of the products. These warranties are non-transferable. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 Quick Mount Smart Dock is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 Vehicle Mount Assembly is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 internal UPS battery is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 AC power supply and cables is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 DC/DC power supply is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 cables (USB, Serial, Communication, Power) is 1 year. The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM3 headset is 1 year. 9 - 2 Back Cvr - 1 Honeywell Scanning & Mobility 9680 Old Bailes Road Fort Mill, SC 29707 www.honeywellaidc.com VM3-W7-UG Rev (a) 3/15
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-09-22 | 1851.25 ~ 1908.75 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2015-04-28 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
3 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
4 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
5 | 1851.25 ~ 1908.75 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2015-09-22
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2015-04-28
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Honeywell International Inc
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0022970339
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
9680 Old Bailes Rd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Fort Mill, South Carolina 29707
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@telefication.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
HD5
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
VM3WWANA
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
M******** R********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Title |
Product Compliance
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
315 5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
315 5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
m******@honeywell.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
W**** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
134, Wu Kung Rd., Wuku Industrial Zone
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
88622******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
88622********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
88622********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
w******@sgs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
Honeywell International Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
V**** D********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
W**** C********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
9680 Old Bailes Road, Fort Mill
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
134, Wu Kung Rd., Wuku Industrial Zone
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
803-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
88622********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
88622********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
v******@Honeywell.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
w******@sgs.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Vehicle Mount Computer | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and 90 and EIRP for Part 24 and 27. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Class II change: adding new antennas (GSA.8841.A.105111/ TG.30.8111 Apex) This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has 20/40 MHz bandwidth modes. DFS operation is slave without radar detection. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has 20/40 MHz bandwidth modes. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and 90 and EIRP for Part 24 and 27. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
R**** W****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
+886-******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
R******@sgs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.402 | 2.5 ppm | 250KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.258 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.567 | 2.5 ppm | 243KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.989 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.557 | 2.5 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.817 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.157 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.31 | 0.151 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 24E | 1851.25 | 1908.75 | 0.361 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 9 | 817.9 | 823.1 | 0.137 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.983 | 2.5 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 1.175 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.897 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 1.014 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.849 | 2.5 ppm | 2M71G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.942 | 2.5 ppm | 13M5D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 17 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.809 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.938 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 19 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.221 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.254 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 21 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.211 | 2.5 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 22 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.245 | 2.5 ppm | 8M98D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.21 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 24 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.239 | 2.5 ppm | 4M53D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 25 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.212 | 2.5 ppm | 8M90G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 26 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 2.5 ppm | 8M93D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 27 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.125 | 2.5 ppm | 4M52G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 28 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.171 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 29 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.128 | 2.5 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.167 | 2.5 ppm | 8M97D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 31 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.863 | 2.5 ppm | 4M50G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 32 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 1.091 | 2.5 ppm | 1M11D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 33 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.83 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 34 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.925 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.033 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC MO ND | 5260 | 5320 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC MO ND | 5500 | 5700 | 0.073 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.05 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.395 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0011000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.402 | 2.5 ppm | 250KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.258 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.567 | 2.5 ppm | 243KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.989 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.557 | 2.5 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.817 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 7 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.157 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 8 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.31 | 0.151 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 9 | 24E | 1851.25 | 1908.75 | 0.361 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 9 | 817.9 | 823.1 | 0.137 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 11 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.983 | 2.5 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 12 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 1.175 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 13 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.897 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 14 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 1.014 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 15 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.849 | 2.5 ppm | 2M71G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 16 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.942 | 2.5 ppm | 13M5D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 17 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.809 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.938 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 19 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.221 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.254 | 2.5 ppm | 1M10D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 21 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.211 | 2.5 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 22 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.245 | 2.5 ppm | 8M98D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.21 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 24 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.239 | 2.5 ppm | 4M53D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 25 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.212 | 2.5 ppm | 8M90G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 26 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.247 | 2.5 ppm | 8M93D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 27 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.125 | 2.5 ppm | 4M52G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 28 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.171 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 29 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.128 | 2.5 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.167 | 2.5 ppm | 8M97D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 31 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.863 | 2.5 ppm | 4M50G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 32 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 1.091 | 2.5 ppm | 1M11D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 33 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.83 | 2.5 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 34 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.925 | 2.5 ppm | 18M0D7W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC